Owner`s manual | Dodge 2005 Neon SRT4 Automobile User Manual

SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle.
Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle
identification number and optional equipment.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN plate.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .20
䡵 Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Program Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
䡵 Illuminated Entry System — If Equipped . . . . . . .16
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Vehicle Theft Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . .40
䡵 Sliding Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Sliding Door Open Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Power Sliding Door — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .49
䡵 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
䡵 Seat Storage Bin Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
▫ Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release . . . . . . . .38
▫ Reinstalling Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Manual Rear Vent Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint Systems (SRS) — Airbags . . . . . . . . . .54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ DaimlerChrysler Corporation Integrated
Child Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
䡵 Rear Seat Delete Feature
(Commercial Vehicles Only) — If Equipped . . . . .78
▫ Restraining Infants And Small Children
With Seat Delete Feature
(Commercial Vehicles Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .82
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Ignition Key Removal
The shift lever must be in PARK. Turn the key to the OFF
position, then the LOCK position. Remove the key.
Vehicle Key
You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
Ignition Key Position
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power
outlets, and removable console (if equipped), will remain
active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel
this feature.
WARNING!
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be injured. Children should be warned not to touch
the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector
lever. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the ignition
switch, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine.
The system will shut the engine off after 2 seconds of
running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle. This
system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only keys that
have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic
regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or
unlocked. During normal operation, the Theft Alarm/
Immobilizer Light will come on for three (3) seconds
immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a
bulb check. Afterwards, if the bulb remains on, this
indicates a problem with the electronics.
If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this
indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the
vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two (2) seconds of running.
Keep in mind that a key which has not been programmed
is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the Theft Alarm/Immobilizer Light comes on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle has been running for
longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been detected in the
electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
• Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder equipped components on the
same keychain will not cause a key-related (transponder) fault unless the additional part is physically held
against the ignition key being used when starting the
vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics
will not cause interference with this system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it can
not be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been
programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
Customer Key Programming
You can program new sentry keys to the system if you
have two valid sentry keys by performing the following
procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime
will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds a single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light
will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.
General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. The Keyless
Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this
procedure.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys.
If you do not have a programmed sentry key, contact
your dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key has been lost, see your
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. This will prevent the lost key from starting
your vehicle. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer
at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless
entry transmitter or open the doors. This feature is only
available if you have Remote Keyless Entry.
The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
turned on.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console, door courtesy
and liftgate lights do not turn on if the dimmer control
is in the interior lights ON position (extreme top
position).
2
• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position).
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Lock the doors by pushing down on the lock plungers on
each door trim panel.
Door Lock Plunger
If the lock plunger is down when you shut the door, the
door will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key.
The Automatic Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by
performing the following procedure:
If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding
door is open, the sliding door will lock.
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the interior
driver’s door lock switch to the LOCK position.
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if:
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
1. The transmission is in gear,
2. all doors are closed,
3. the vehicle speed is above 18 mph (29 km/h) and
4. the doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
switch.
2. Cycle the ignition switch ON/OFF four times ending
in the OFF position. (do not start the engine)
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the above
mentioned procedure or by performing the procedure in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), Customer Programmable Features section on vehicles so
equipped. (See page 164 for more information.)
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Unlock On Exit— If Equipped
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Auto Door Locks feature is enabled and the Auto
Unlock On Exit feature is enabled,
2. the transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h),
3. the transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK,
4. any door is opened (excluding liftgate) and
5. the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
The Auto Unlock On Exit feature can be enabled or
disabled by performing the procedure in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), Customer Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped. (See
page 164 for more information.)
NOTE: Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock
features in accordance with local laws.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, and activate the panic alarm, optional power
liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding
door from distances up to about 23 feet (7 meters) using
a hand held radio transmitter. The transmitter need not
be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: If the key is in the ignition switch, then all
buttons on that transmitter will be disabled. The buttons
on the remaining transmitters will work. If the vehicle is
shifted out of PARK, all the transmitter buttons are
disabled for all keys.
Two (2) transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle.
Vehicles built without the powered options will be
equipped from the factory with three button transmitters
and those built with power options will be equipped
with six button transmitters.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Three button transmitters will provide basic UNLOCK,
LOCK and PANIC functions.
options of the system allow you to turn ON/OFF the
Sound Horn On Lock, Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st,
and Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock features.
Three Button Transmitter
Six button transmitters will provide functions that allow
the same basic operation as the three button, but may also
be used to Open/Close the optional power liftgate, left
power sliding door, or right power sliding door. Other
Six Button Transmitter
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter
once to unlock the driver’s door side of the vehicle, or
twice to unlock all doors and liftgate. The illuminated
entry system also turns on.
The Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st feature can be
enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure:
1. Press the UNLOCK button for 5 to 10 seconds.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after 5 seconds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons.
The “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st” feature can be
reactivated by repeating the above mentioned procedure
or by performing the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), Customer Programmable
Features section on vehicles so equipped. (See page 164
for more information.)
To lock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors and liftgate. The horn will chirp once to
acknowledge the signal.
If desired, the “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be
turned on and off by performing the following procedure:
1. Press the LOCK button for 5 to 10 seconds.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after 5 seconds),
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
The “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be reactivated by
repeating this procedure or by performing the procedure
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
Customer Programmable Features section on vehicles so
equipped. (See page 164 for more information.)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Using The Panic Alarm:
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you
turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or
by turning the ignition switch to the ON position.
NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
To Program Transmitters:
Refer to SENTRY KEY “Customer Key Programming.”
(See page 15 for more information.)
If you do not have a programmed transmitter, contact
your dealer for details.
To Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Press the LIFTGATE button twice within five seconds to
open/close the power liftgate. The liftgate will beep for 2
seconds and then open/close. If the button is pushed
while the liftgate is being power closed, the liftgate will
reverse to the full open position.
If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a
powered liftgate, pressing the button twice will result in
the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing
you to manually access the liftgate area.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Open/Close Left Power Sliding Door — If
Equipped
Press the LEFT button twice within five seconds to
open/close the left power sliding door. If the button is
pushed while the door is being power closed, the door
will reverse to the full open position.
If the vehicle is not equipped with a left power sliding
door and the door is closed and locked, pressing the
button twice will result in the left side doors becoming
unlocked.
To Open/Close Right Power Sliding Door — If
Equipped
Press the RIGHT button twice within five seconds to
open/close the right power sliding door. If the button is
pushed while the door is being power closed, the door
will reverse to the full open position.
If the vehicle is not equipped with a right power sliding
door and the door is closed and locked, pressing the
button twice will result in the right side doors becoming
unlocked.
To Turn Off “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” — If
Equipped
If desired, the “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature
can be turned on and off by performing the following
procedure:
1. Press the LOCK button for 5 to 10 seconds.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed, (after 5 seconds)
press the UNLOCK button. Release both buttons.
The “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure or by performing
the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), Customer Programmable Features section on
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
vehicles so equipped. The table below explains the Lamp
Flash options. (See page 164 for more information.)
Function
Lock
Unlock 1st
Press
Unlock All
Doors
Left Side
Right Side
Liftgate
Which Turn Signal
Lamps
All
Left Side
Number of
Flashes
1
2
All
2
Left Side
Right Side
All
2
2
2
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate
from a normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a thin
coin to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart. Make
sure not to damage the rubber gasket during removal.
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the transmitter case snap two halves
together. Make sure there is an even “gap” between the
two halves. Test transmitter operation.
Separating Transmitter Halves
VEHICLE THEFT ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition
switch for unauthorized entry or operation. When the
alarm is activated, the system provides both audible and
visual signals. The horn will pulse, headlights/park
lights will flash, the Vehicle Theft Alarm/Immobilizer
light, located in the instrument cluster, will flash, and the
vehicle will not start. If the alarm is triggered and no
action is taken to disarm it, the system will turn off the
horn after three minutes and after 15 minutes of light
only operation the system will then rearm itself.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
To arm the system: Remove the key from the ignition
switch and either:
1. Press a power door lock button while the driver’s or
passenger’s door is open.
2. Press the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter.
After the last door is closed, or if all doors are closed, the
system will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that
time, the Vehicle Theft Alarm/Immobilizer light will
flash. If it does not illuminate, the system is not arming.
If you open a door during this arming period, the system
will cancel the arming process. You must repeat one of
the previously described arming sequences to rearm the
system.
To disarm the system: Press the UNLOCK button on the
keyless entry transmitter. Also, using a valid sentry key
and moving the ignition switch to the ON/START position will disarm the system. If you disarm the system and
access the liftgate area, the system must be rearmed, as
described previously, when closing the liftgate. If something has triggered the system in your absence, the horn
will sound three times when you disarm the system.
Check the vehicle for tampering.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door and liftgate key cylinders cannot
arm or disarm the system.
• Once the alarm is set, and the liftgate button on the
keyless entry transmitter is pressed, on a non-power
liftgate vehicle, you have a 30 second one time access
into the liftgate area. If the liftgate is not opened within
30 seconds the liftgate will remain locked.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The system remains armed during liftgate entry, pressing the liftgate button will not disarm the system, if
someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and
opens any door the alarm will sound.
• When the system is armed, the doors can not be
unlocked from the interior power door lock switches.
The Vehicle Theft Alarm system is designed to protect
your vehicle, however, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
system will arm regardless of whether you are in the
vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
system.
The alarm system will be activated when the battery is
connected if the system was previously armed. The
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound, and the
ignition will not start the vehicle. If this occurs, disarm
the system.
SLIDING SIDE DOOR
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
outside. Pull out on the outside handle to open the
sliding door from the outside. To open the sliding door
from the inside, press the button on the grab handle and
open the door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
• Avoid high impacts against the door stop when opening the door. This is very important when your vehicle
is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in
the downhill direction.
• There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
push the button on the inside grab handle or pull out
on the outside sliding door handle.
Sliding Door Hardware
To keep your door operating properly, observe the following guidelines:
• Always open the door smoothly.
• Use the grab handle on the inside of the sliding door to
assist you in closing and securing the door.
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
any time the vehicle is in motion.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The driver’s side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
Sliding Door Open Flash
When the sliding door(s) are opened, the left and right
exterior hazard lights will flash for 12 seconds to alert
other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be
entering or exiting the vehicle.
The Sliding Door Open Flash can be enabled or disabled
by performing the following procedure:
1. Place the key in the ignition switch.
2. Cycle the ignition switch ON/OFF four times ending
in the OFF position. (do not start the engine)
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the hazard
switch.
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the above
mentioned procedure or by performing the procedure in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), Customer Programmable Features section on vehicles so
equipped.
Power Sliding Door — If Equipped
NOTE: The power sliding door must be unlocked before
the switches located on the trim panel, just in front of the
power sliding door will operate.
The power sliding door may be opened manually or by
using the buttons on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Press the buttons on the remote keyless entry transmitter
twice within five seconds, to open a power sliding door.
Once the door is fully open, pressing the button twice
within five seconds a second time will close the door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
The power sliding door may also be opened by pressing
the switches on the overhead console or the switch
located on the trim panel just in front of the sliding door.
To keep your door operating properly, observe the following guidelines.
There are power sliding door switches located on the
trim panel just in front of the power sliding door for the
rear seat passengers. Pressing the switch once will open
the power sliding door, once the door is fully open
pressing the switch a second time will close the door.
• Always open the door smoothly.
• Avoid high impacts against the door stop when opening the door manually. This is very important when
your vehicle is parked on an incline as the door will
slide faster in the downhill direction.
• There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
sliding door open on any incline. To close the power
sliding door after the hold-open latch is activated, you
must press any one of the power sliding door
switches, push the button on the inside grab handle or
pull out on the outside sliding door handle.
Power Sliding Door Switch
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the inside or outside door handles are used while the
power sliding door is activated, the power sliding door
feature will be canceled and the door must be opened or
closed manually.
• If the power sliding door is not in the full open or close
position, it will fully open when a power sliding door
switch is pressed. To close the door, wait until it is fully
open and then press the switch again.
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
door from the rear seats, press the button located in the
overhead console to disable the switches for the rear seat
passengers.
• The power sliding door switches will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
NOTE:
• If anything obstructs the power sliding door while it is
closing or opening, the door will automatically reverse
to the closed or open position, provided it meets
sufficient resistance.
• The driver’s side sliding door cannot be opened while
the fuel door is open. This feature operates only when
the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
• If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop and must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if caught in the path
of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear
before closing the door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
child protection door lock system.
2
WARNING!
To avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision. Remember that the sliding doors can only be
opened from the outside door handle or the switches
located on the trim panel just in front of the power
sliding door when the child protection locks are
engaged.
To activate the system, open the sliding door and move
the child lock control, located near the door’s rear latch,
to the ON position.
Child Lock Control
When the child lock system is engaged the door can be
opened only by using the outside door handle, remote
keyless entry transmitter, switches on the overhead console or the switches located on the trim panel just in front
of the power sliding door, even though the inside door
lock is in the unlocked position.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The power sliding door will operate from the switches
located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding
door, regardless of the child lock lever position. To avoid
unintentional operation of the power sliding door from
the rear seats, press the button located in the overhead
console to disable the switches for the rear seat passengers.
NOTE:
• The power sliding door switches will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
• The power sliding door will operate from the remote
keyless entry transmitter, if the vehicle is in Park,
regardless of the child lock lever position.
LIFTGATE
NOTE: The key that is used to start the vehicle is also
used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate.
To open the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and turn
to the right. On vehicles equipped with power locks the
liftgate can also be unlocked using the remote keyless
entry or by activating the power door lock switches
located on the front doors.
Once unlocked, on vehicles equipped with power locks,
the liftgate can be opened or closed without using the
key. To open the liftgate, depress the liftgate release
switch located on the underside of the license plate bar
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE: On vehicles without power locks, the liftgate can
only be opened using the vehicle keys. The key must be
held in the unlocked position for the liftgate to open.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. Press
the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter twice
within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the
liftgate is fully open, pressing the button twice within
five seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
Liftgate Release Switch
If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a
powered liftgate, pressing the button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to manually
access the liftgate area.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The power liftgate may also be opened by pressing the
button located on the overhead console.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
Power Liftgate Switch
When the remote keyless entry transmitter button is
pressed and the “Lamp Flash” feature is enabled, the tail
lights will flash to signal that the liftgate is opening or
closing.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
• The power liftgate must be in the full open or close
positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the
liftgate is not in the full open or close positions it must
be opened or closed manually.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and must be opened or closed manually.
• If the liftgate release button is activated while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
WARNING!
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below ⫺12°F (⫺24°C) or temperatures above 143°F
(62°C). Be sure to remove any build-up of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate buttons.
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release strap is built into the storage bin cover latching
mechanism.
SEAT STORAGE BIN SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended. Do not allow children to have
access to the 2nd row seat storage bins. Once in the
storage bin, young children may not be able to
escape. If trapped in the storage bin, children can die
from suffocation or heat stroke.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark strap
attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
2
Reinstalling Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release
If the storage bin cover strap disengages from the latch, it
can be reinstalled by inserting the loose end of the strap
into the latch mechanism.
Push the strap into the latch mechanism until it engages
around the latch post.
Reinstall Cover Strap
NOTE: Do not use the storage bin emergency release to
lift the storage bin cover. The strap is intended for
emergency release only.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Manual Rear Vent Windows
A lever at the rear of each window releases the window
so that it can be pushed out for ventilation.
Power Vent Windows — If Equipped
Switches on the driver’s door trim panel let the driver
operate the two vent windows from the front seat.
Power Vent Window Switches
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Power Windows — If Equipped
You can control either front window using switches on the
driver’s door trim panel. There is a single switch on the
passenger’s door trim panel which operates the passenger
door window. The switches will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position.
Auto Down Feature — If Equipped
The driver’s window switch has an auto down feature.
Press the window switch past the detent, release, and the
window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to
stop.
The power window switches remain active for up to 45
seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
Power Window Switches
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger, driver
inflatable knee blocker and if equipped, window bags for
the driver and passengers seated next to a window. If you
will be carrying children too small for adult-size seat
belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren) also, can be used to
hold infant and child restraint systems.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) there will be a Passenger Airbag
Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light located on the center of
the instrument panel.
Passenger Airbag Disabled Light
NOTE: The front airbags have a multi stage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on collision severity.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the outboard seats in your vehicle are equipped with
Lap/Shoulder Belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the
front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. Grasp
the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go
around your lap.
Latch Plate
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
Latch Plate To Buckle
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more likely
to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be
used together.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
downward to help position the belt away from your
neck. The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by
pushing anywhere on the anchorage. To move the anchorage downward, press the actuation button while
simultaneously pushing down on the anchorage assembly.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seats and the second row outboard seats, the
shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
2
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
Positioning Latch Plate
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Sliding The Latch Plate
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Creating A Fold
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Center Lap Belts
The center seating positions have a lap belt only. To fasten
the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click”. To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the latch plate
and pull. To remove slack, pull the loose end of the
webbing.
Wear the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back and erect
in the seat, then adjust the belt as tightly as is comfortable.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous.
• A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down
and under the belt in a collision.
• A belt that is too high will apply crash forces to
the abdomen, not to the stronger hip bones. In
either case, the risk of internal injuries is greater.
Wear a lap belt low and snug.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belt buckles for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners are designed to work for all
size occupants.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt
is buckled.
The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag control module (see Front Airbag Section). Like the front
airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. After a
collision that is severe enough to deploy the front airbags
and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated if the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt has not been
buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will alert the
driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt. The
driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle
their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or RUN position. DaimlerChrysler does not recommend
deactivating the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position (engine
does not need to be running), and wait for the Seat Belt
Warning Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. A single
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
completed the programming.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s or
front passenger’s seat belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can
provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
should be used only if the existing belt is not long
enough. When it is not required, remove the extender
and stow it.
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint Systems (SRS) — Airbags
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
Front Airbag Components
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment in low
speed collisions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal
regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to
“Occupant Classification System” in this section).
2
This vehicle may also be equipped with a driver inflatable knee blocker located on the instrument panel below
the steering column.
This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to
protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next
to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window
bags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
Window Bags
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers
or attempt to manually open them. You may damage
the airbags and you could be injured because the
airbags are not there to protect you. These protective
covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open
only when the airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do
not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to
block the location of the window bag. The area
where the window bag is located should remain free
from any obstructions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on
the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the window bags.
Along with the seat belts and front seat belt buckle
pretensioners, front airbags work with the intsrument
panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for
the driver and front passenger. Window bags also work
with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classification System (refer to “Occupant Classification System” in this section) has determined the seat is empty or
is occupied by a child.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
If your vehicle is equipped, the window bag on the crash
side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side
collisions. But even in collisions where the airbags inflate,
you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position
for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (refer to section on Child Restraint)
should be secured in the rear seat, in a child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat. Older children who do not
use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat, and in
the outboard seat if possible. Never allow children to
slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. See the section on Child Restraint.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags
room to inflate.
4. If your vehicle has window bags, do not lean against
the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag deployment could
cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate.
Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• If the vehicle has window bags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
The Airbag System consists of the following:
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
• AIRBAG Readiness Light
• Front Passenger Seat Occupant Classification System
(OCS) — If Equipped
• Driver Airbag
• Front Passenger Airbag
− Occupant Classification Module
• Window Bags above Side Windows (If Equipped)
− Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light
• Front Impact Sensors
− Interconnecting Wiring
• Side Impact Sensors (If Equipped)
− Bladder Assembly
• Steering Wheel and Column
− Belt Tension Sensor
• Instrument Panel
• Seat Belt Readiness Light
• Front Seat Belt Buckle Pretensioners
• Interconnecting Wiring
How The Airbag System Works
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. Based on the level of collision
severity, the front control module determines the
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
proper rate of inflation. The front airbag inflators are
designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation.
• The ORC may modify the rate of inflation based on the
occupant size provided by the Occupant Classification
Module.
• The ORC will not detect side, roll over, or rear impacts.
• The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and
column, instrument panel and passenger knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF position, in the ACC
position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not on
and will not inflate.
• Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning light and PAD indicator light in the
center of the instrument panel for 6 to 8
seconds for a self-check when the ignition is
first turned on. After the self-check, the AIRBAG
warning light will turn off. The PAD indicator light
will function normally (Refer to “Passenger Airbag
Disable (PAD) Indicator Light” in this section). If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the AIRBAG warning light either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the
light comes on again after initial start up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have the airbag system
checked right away.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC and
impact sensors detects a collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags.
Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based
on collision severity and occupant size. The steering
wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the
instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the airbags inflate to their full size. The airbags fully
inflate in about 50–70 milliseconds. This is about half
of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The airbags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The driver’s and passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through the airbag material towards the instrument
panel. In this way the airbags do not interfere with
your control of the vehicle.
• The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to
activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC
and the side impact sensors (with side impact option)
detects a collision requiring the window bags to
inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the window bag. The inflating window bag
pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the
way and covers the window. The airbag inflates in
about 30 milliseconds (about one quarter of the time it
takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure
you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the window bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The window bag is only about 31⁄2 inches (9 cm) thick when it
is inflated.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• When the ORC and the side impact sensors (with side
impact option) detects a collision requiring the Driver
Inflatable Knee Blocker , it signals the inflator unit. A
quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the
Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker. The Driver Inflatable
Knee Blocker inflates rearward towards the driver’s
knees to help protect the knees and position you for
the best interaction with the front airbag. The Driver
Inflatable Knee Blocker fully inflates in about 50
milliseconds, this is only about half of the time it takes
you to blink your eyes. It then quickly deflates while
helping to protect the driver’s knees.
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees, and
position everyone for the best interaction with the
front airbag.
• If your vehicle contains a Passenger Airbag Disable
indicator light, it will be equipped with the Occupant
Classification System (OCS). The OCS system will
classify an occupant into a size category based on
sensor readings from within the seat cushion. Occupants should try to remain in a normally seated
position. If the occupant’s weight is transferred to
another object in the vehicle (i.e. feet on the dashboard), the OCS may not be able to properly approximate occupant size. Furthermore, the occupant size
may appear to increase or decrease due to objects
hanging on the seat, other passengers pushing on the
seat, or objects lodged underneath the seat. Ensure
that the front passenger seat back does not touch
anything placed on the back seat because this can also
affect occupant classification. Also, if you fold down
the rear seat, check to be sure it doesn’t touch the front
passenger seat.
If there is a rapid change in temperature or humidity,
the OCS may not be able to properly approximate
occupant size. If your seat including your trim cover
and cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used.
If there is a fault present in the system, the AIRBAG
warning light will illuminate indicating that you should
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. In the presence
of an occupant in the passenger seat, if both the PAD
indicator light and AIRBAG warning light are illuminated the airbag will be disabled.
The ORC will not allow front airbag deployment in the
event of a collision for occupants classified into the empty
or child size categories. The PAD indicator light will
illuminate indicating that the Passenger Airbag is OFF
when the OCS has determined that the occupant size
category is a child. Also, when the seat is empty or an
object that weighs less than a predetermined threshold is
placed on the seat, the light will remain OFF. (The PAD
indicator light is an amber light located on the center of the
instrument panel above the radio.)
2
Passenger Airbag Disabled Light
For almost all sizes of properly seated adults, the airbag
will be enabled in the event of a collision. For small
teenagers and some small adults, depending on size, the
airbag may or may not be enabled in the event of a
collision. Both drivers and passengers should always use
the PAD indicator light as an indication if the front
passenger is properly positioned or not. If the PAD
indicator light comes on when an adult is in the passenger seat, have the passenger re-position themselves in the
seat until the light goes out.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remember, if the PAD indicator light is illuminated the
passenger front airbag will not inflate. For almost all
properly installed child restraints, the “PAD Indicator
Light” will be illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag is turned off and will not inflate. If the
“PAD Indicator Light” is not illuminated, DO NOT
assume the airbag is turned off and move the child
restraint to the rear seat. A deploying passenger airbag
can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear
facing infant seat.
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
Occupant Classification System, children 12 years and
under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an
appropriate child restraint.
• The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) — If
Equipped is located beneath the front passenger seat.
The OCM classifies the occupant into one of three size
categories based on the input from the Bladder Assembly and Belt Tension Sensor. The size categories include empty, child, and adult. The OCM sends the
Occupant Classification to the ORC to identify if a
front passenger airbag is allowed. If a fault is present,
the AIRBAG warning light is illuminated.
• The Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator
Light — If Equipped indicates to the driver and
passenger when the airbag is turned OFF in the
presence of a properly seated occupant. When the PAD
indicator light is illuminated, the airbag is OFF. Also,
when the Occupant Classification System detects either an empty seat or a weight less than the predetermined occupant threshold, the ORC will not illuminate the PAD indicator light even though the airbag is
turned OFF. When the ocs system detects an adult the
PAD indicator light will be off, and the airbag will be
enabled.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
• The Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) — If Equipped is
located at the outboard passenger lap belt anchor. The
BTS generates a signal based on outboard lap belt
tension. This signal is sent to the OCM to ensure that
the resultant bladder pressure increase due to applied
lap belt tension does not cause a small occupant to be
classified as a larger occupant.
• The Bladder Assembly — If Equipped is located
beneath the seat cushion foam. The pressure sensor
sends a signal to the OCM.
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical components that affect the front passenger airbag deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat components are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calculate the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related components, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS).
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not modify the front seat center console or center
position seat in any way.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/
Mopar.
• For replacement of the bladder or seat cover assembly,
always use the DaimlerChrysler service kit which
includes the seat cover and bladder riveted together.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags
when the ORC and impact sensors detect a moderate-tosevere collision, to help restrain the vehicle passengers,
and then immediately deflate.
NOTE: A collision that is not severe enough to need
airbag protection will not activate the system. This does
not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags, front seat belt buckle pretensioners and driver inflatable knee blocker cannot protect
you in another collision. Have the airbags, front seat
belt buckle pretensioners and driver inflatable knee
blocker replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Also, have the Occupant Classification
System serviced as well.
Enhanced Accident Response
If the airbags and seat belt pertensioners deploy after an
impact and the electrical system remains functional,
vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock
automatically. In addition, approximately 10 seconds
after the vehicle has stopped moving, the interior lights
will illuminate until the ignition switch is turned off.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause
it to fail when you need it. You could be injured because the
airbags are not there to protect you. Do not modify the
components or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify
the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag
system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not
function properly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag
system service. If your seat including your trim cover and
cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including removal
or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the
vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
WARNING!
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
• The AIRBAG light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
DaimlerChrysler Corporation Integrated Child
Seat — If Equipped
Operating instructions for this seat are included with the
seat. If the instructions are not with the seat or in the
Owner’s Manual Package, replacement instructions can
be obtained.
To obtain Integrated Child Seat replacement
instructions:
Use the order form at the back of this manual and specify
publication number 81-016-1950.
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats, rather than in the front.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Infants and Child Restraints
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap
could become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)” later in this section.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the right seat for
your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
• Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)” later in
this section.
• The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child can
not sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat cushion
while the child’s back is against the seat back, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If this doesn’t
help, move the child to the center rear seating position
and use the lap belt. Never allow a child to put the
shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-SEATCHECK.
to
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching
latch plates, which are designed to keep the lap
portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. Pulling up on the
shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten
the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt
tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen with
time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if
necessary.
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Each vehicle, except commercial cargo vehicles, is
equipped with the child restraint anchorage system
called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren. Two LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are installed on all second-row seats and in
the center position on all 3rd row fold-in-floor seats.
Second-row seats also feature tether strap anchorages,
located in the rear surface of the seatback. In addition, all
3-passenger bench seats and 3rd row fold-in-floor seats
are equipped with a child restraint tether anchor at the
center seating position.
Latch Anchorages
When using the tether anchorages in the outboard seating positions, ensure that the strap is routed over the top
of the seatback and under the head restraint between the
head restraint posts. Except for bench seats with split
seatbacks, when the tether anchorage is used in the center
seating position, the strap should be positioned straight
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
over the top of the seatback. For bench seats with split
seatbacks, route the tether between the seatbacks.
WARNING!
When using the tether anchorages in the center position
on 3rd row fold-in-floor seating, ensure that the strap is
routed over the top of the seatback and under the head
restraint between the head restraint posts.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
older products.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
Tether Strap Mounting
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Fleet vehicles equipped with the LATCH system on the
3-passenger bench seat must have the seat adjusted to the
full rear position on the tracks when the LATCH system
is used. Also, when using the LATCH system, be sure the
seatback is two clicks rear of its full upright position.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
Installing the Child Restraint System
If your fleet vehicle is equipped with LATCH anchorages
on the 3-passenger bench seat, do not install three child
restraints at the same time in this seat. The anchorages in
this seat are not designed to restrain three child restraints
at one time. Instead, you may install one child restraint at
the center position, or one child restraint at each of the
right and left positions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING!
Fleet Vehicles Only:
Do not install child restraint systems equipped with
LATCH attachments at all three seating positions in
the seat at one time. The LATCH anchorages in this
seat are designed to restrain no more than two child
restraints at a time in the event of a collision. Failure
to follow this may result in serious or fatal injury.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system.
WARNING!
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap.
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE (COMMERCIAL
VEHICLES ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED
Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a
family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children
in the front passenger seat. However, if you must carry a
child in a vehicle without a rear seat, the passenger seat
should be moved to the full rearward position and the
child must be in a proper restraint system based on it’s
age, size and weight. NEVER carry a child in a rear facing
infant carrier in a vehicle without rear seats. In an
accident, serious injury or death may occur from the
deploying passenger air bag.
This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether
anchor located on the floor, behind the front passenger
seat. Use this tether anchor to secure only forward
facing child restraints equipped with an upper tether
strap.
WARNING!
Rear Facing Infant restraints must never be secured
in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a passenger
airbag. In an accident a passenger airbag may deploy
causing severe injury or death to infants riding in
rear facing infant restraints.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Restraining Infants and Small Children with Seat
Delete Feature (Commercial Vehicles Only)
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is
correct for your child:
• The rearward-facing infant carrier is for babies weighing up to about 20 lbs (9 kg), and less than one year
old. THIS TYPE OF SEAT CANNOT BE USED IN A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE (Commercial Vehicles Only).
• The forward-facing child seat is for children from
about 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and more than one year
old.
• A “convertible” child seat, one that is designed to be
used for children who are too heavy for a rear facing
infant seat, may be used IN THE FORWARD FACING
POSITION ONLY, IT MUST NEVER BE INSTALLED
FACING TO THE REAR IN A VEHICLE EQUIPPED
WITH THE REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE (Commercial Vehicles Only). When a convertible seat is
properly installed forward facing, the vehicle seat
should be adjusted to the rear most position.
• Children more than 40 lbs (18 kg) should be secured in
the passenger seat in a child restraint or beltpositioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to the
rear most position. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled in the passenger seat
with the seat adjusted to the rear most position. Never
allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them
or under their arm.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tether Installation For Commercial Vehicles With
Rear Seat Delete
To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the
vehicle, follow the instructions shown:
2. Extend the child restraint tether anchor forward towards the front passenger seat.
1. Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the floor
just behind the front passenger seat.
Tether To Anchor
3. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the
extended tether strap.
Tether Anchor Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
4. If necessary, raise the passenger seat head restraint to
allow the tether strap to be routed under the head restraint.
5. Route the tether strap beneath the head restraint
between the two head restraint posts. Ensure that the
child restraint tether strap is centered between the two
head restraint posts.
6. Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether
strap, attach the child restraint tether strap to the metal
ring on the vehicle tether anchor.
7. Following the child seat manufacturer’s instructions,
tighten the child restraint tether strap.
8. If necessary, reposition the seat head restraint.
9. Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks, abrasions,
discoloration, and loose threads. If these, or any other
condition that might effect the performance of the strap is
observed, DO NOT USE. Contact your local
DaimlerChrysler dealership for a replacement part.
NOTE: Stow the child restraint tether strap in its
original position when not in use.
Tether Strap Mounting
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used
with a child restraint only. It should not be used for
any other purpose. Before use inspect the tether
anchor strap for nicks, abrasions, discoloration, and
loose threads. If these or any other condition that
might effect the performance of the strap is observed, DO NOT USE, personal injury may result.
Contact your local DaimlerChrysler dealership for a
replacement part.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
SAFETY TIPS
WARNING!
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the deck lid/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt buckle pretensioners must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc. If there is any question
regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the belt.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6
to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the LED is not lit
during starting, have it checked. If the light
stays on or comes on while driving, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid or brake
fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and
corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . .90
▫ Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Power Remote-Control Mirrors —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
3
▫ Heated Remote Control Mirrors —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . .93
䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Manual Front & Second Row Seat Adjuster . . . 117
▫ 8–Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . 118
▫ 6–Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped . 118
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints — If Equipped . . . 119
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . 120
▫ Manual Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Middle Rear Bench Seat Recline —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Stow ’n Go Seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Easy Access Seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Middle Quad Fold & Tumble Seat Removal . . . 131
▫ 50/50 Fold & Tumble Rear Seat Removal . . . . 133
▫ 2 – Passenger And 3 – Passenger Bench Seats . 135
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Rear-Most Bench Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Rear Seat Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Rear Bench Seating Flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Rear Quad And 50/50 Seating Flexibility . . . . 139
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Park Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . 145
䡵 Traction Control Switch — If Equipped . . . . . . . 150
▫ Daytime Running Lights
(Canada/Fleet Vehicles Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
䡵 Rear Park Assist System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 151
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ Battery Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ Headlamp Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 146
䡵 Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Headlight Low/High Beam Selector Switch . . . 148
▫ Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 148
䡵 Tilt Steering Column — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 150
䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 153
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 155
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
䡵 Overhead Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
3
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Express Open Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Programming Homelink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 171
▫ Using Homelink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Erasing Homelink Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Reprogramming a Single Homelink Button . . . 172
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped . . . . . . . 175
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 177
䡵 Convenience Tray Drawer And Cup Holders . . . 177
▫ Instrument Panel Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Convenience Tray And Optional Smoker’s
Package Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Front Seat Storage Bin — If Equipped . . . . . . . 180
▫ Second Row Seat Storage Bins — If Equipped . 181
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
▫ Overhead Rail System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 182
▫ Cargo/Tub Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Removable Floor Console With Fold-In-Floor
Seating — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Coat Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Removable Floor Console Without Fold-In-Floor
Seating — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Rear Compartment Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Cargo Area Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 190
䡵 Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
3
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical adjustment of the mirror.
MANUAL REARVIEW MIRROR
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
If the switch is in the “Auto” position the mirror will
automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare from
vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by
pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light in the
button will illuminate to indicate when this feature is on.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
AUTO MIRROR
Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If
Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn this feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
Rearview Mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature
All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions; full forward, full rearward, and
normal.
3
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the portion of the mirror closest to
the vehicle. This type of mirror will give a much wider
view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror.
Power Remote-Control Mirrors — If Equipped
Use the mirror select switch, located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering column, to adjust the view
obtained in the outside mirrors. Press the rocker switch to
the L or R for Left or Right mirror selection. Use the
center off position to guard against accidentally moving
a mirror position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Heated Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature
is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window
Defrost.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Power Mirror Switches
Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the
direction you want the mirror to move.
Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped
This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
increased coverage.
3
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation.
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can either be adjusted from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
UConnect™ Switches
The UConnect™ system can be used with any HandsFree Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
3
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt
or another prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
example, you can either use the combined form voice
command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break
the combined form command into two voice commands: ⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the UConnect™ system works best when you talk
in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some
one sitting eight feet away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to
know what your options are at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙
following the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will
play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
NOTE:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ⬙Pair a
Phone.⬙
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number which
you will later need to enter into your cellular. You can
enter any four-digit pin number. You will not need to
remember this pin number after the initial pairing
process.
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you to begin
the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular
phone. Before attempting to pair phone, please see
your cellular phone’s user manual (Bluetooth section)
for instructions on how to complete this step.
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙).
Dial by Saying a Number
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙ The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. The UConnect™ limits the user from
dialing invalid combination of numbers. For example,
234-567-890 is nine digits long, which is not a valid
phone number - the closest valid phone number has
ten digits.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Call by Saying a Name
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Call.⬙
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phonebook. Refer to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.:
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
• After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted. Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name and say ⬙Call.⬙ NOTE: the user can also exercise
⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ operations at this point.
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The
UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today
do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either
answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ⬙Toggling Between Calls.⬙ To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call.⬙
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the ⬘Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has
been placed on hold. To bring the call back from hold,
press and hold the ⬘Phone’ button until you hear a single
beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Redial
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under ⬙Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ system.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ⬘Phone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
UConnect™ System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change operation, only the language specific 32 name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voicemail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g. the UConnect™ system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number ⬙#121,⬙ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute.⬙
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred to your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute-off.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, follow the instruction
described in your cellular phone user’s manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone pairing”.
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the ⬘Voice recognition’
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a paired phone.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone.⬙
• The phone names along with priority numbers will be
announced.
• When prompted say the priority number of the cellular phone you wish to select. You can also press the
⬘Voice Recognition’ button anytime while the list is
being played, then say the priority number of the
phone that you wish to select.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UConnect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
⬘Voice Recognition’ button anytime while the list is
being played and say the priority number of the phone
you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
Voice Recognition (VR)
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete.⬙
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
• The phone names along with priority numbers will be
announced.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
• When prompted say the priority number of the cellular phone you wish to delete. You can also press the
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• UConnect™ phonebook name tag recognition rate is
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• When navigating through an automated system, such
as, voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙send.⬙
Far End Audio Performance
• Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
• fully closed windows, and
• dry weather condition.
• Operation from driver seat.
• Performance, such as, audio clarity, echo. and loudness to a large degree, rely on the phone and network,
and not the UConnect™ system.
• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to occasionally lose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
North American English
Primary
Alternate(s)
Zero
Oh
Add location
Add new
All
All of them
Confirmation prompts
Confirmations prompts
Delete a name
Delete
Language
Select language
List names
List all
List paired phones
List phones
Pager
Beeper
Phone pairing
Pairing
Phonebook
Phone book
Return to main menu
Return. Main menu
Select phone
select
Set up
Phone settings phone set
up
SEATS
Manual Front & Second Row Seat Adjuster
The adjusting bar is located under the front of the seat.
Pull the bar up and move the seat to the desired position.
Release the bar to lock the seat into position.
Manual Seat Adjuster
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured.
8–Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The driver’s power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the seat. The front switch controls
up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt adjustment. The
rear switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.
Driver Power Seat Switch
6–Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The front passenger’s power seat switches are located on
the outboard side of the seat. The front switch controls
forward, rearward and vertical up and down adjustment
of the front of the seat only. The rear switch controls the
seatback recline adjustment.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Adjustable Head Restraints — If Equipped
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the head restraint so that the upper edge is as high as
practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, depress the release
tab located at the base of the head restraint and push
down on the head restraint.
3
Adjustable Head Restraints
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats.
The controls for the heated seats are located on the
instrument panel above the radio. You may choose LOW,
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH or No Heat. The switch position as well as an
indicator light will show when the LOW or HIGH heat is
ON.
Heated seat switches
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
The recliner mechanism control is on the outboard side of
the seat. To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever,
then push back to the desired position and release the
lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the
seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback
has latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Reclining Seat Control
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Lumbar — If Equipped
The lumbar adjustment handle is located inboard under
the armrest. To increase the support, rotate the handle
down.
Middle Rear Bench Seat Recline — If Equipped
Pull up on the handle located on the side of the seat to
release the seatback. This allows the seatback to be either
reclined or folded forward.
Manual Lumbar Control
Manual Reclining Seat Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Stow ’n Go Seating
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seating, the
second and third row seats may be folded into the floor
for convenient storage.
To Fold Second Row Seats
3
1. Lower the head restraint and raise the armrests on the
second row seat.
2. Slide storage bin locking mechanism to the ⬙Locked⬙
position and then pull up on the storage bin latch to open
cover.
Load Floor Handle
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever located on the
outboard side of the seat and fold the seatback down.
Seat Release Strap
5. Close the storage bin cover.
Seatback Release Lever
NOTE: The cupholder must be in the closed position
before the seat can be tumbled into the floor.
4. Pull rearward on the release strap located at the rear of
the seat and tumble the seat forward into the storage bin.
To Unfold Second Row Seats
1. Slide storage bin locking mechanism to the ⬙Locked⬙
position and then pull up on the storage bin latch to open
cover.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
2. Pull up on the handle to lift the seat out of the storage
bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors.
3
Seatback Release Lever
Seat Handle
3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, to return the seatback to its full
upright position.
4. Close the storage bin cover and adjust the head
restraint to the desired position.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Fold Third Row Seats
3. Pull release strap marked “2” to release the anchors.
1. Lower the head restraint to its full down position.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” located on the rear of the
seat to lower the seatback.
Release Strap 2
Release Strap 1
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
4. Pull release strap marked “3” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors
latch.
3
Release Strap 3
Assist Strap
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to unlock the recliner.
3. Pull release strap marked “3” to return the seatback to
its full upright position.
4. Adjust the head restraint to the desired position.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Release Strap 3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Tailgate Mode
1. Pull release strap “2”, then pull release strap “3” to
rotate the entire seat rearward.
2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the
seatback and push forward until the anchors latch.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death, never operate the
vehicle with occupants in the third row seat, while in
the tailgate mode.
Easy Access Seating
The passenger’s and driver’s side second row seats can
be tilted forward for easy access to the third row seat or
rear cargo area.
Release Straps 2 & 3
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To tilt the seat on vehicles equipped with quad seats, pull
up on the release handle located on the outboard side of
the seat and tilt the seat fully forward. To return the seat,
lower the seat and ensure that it is fully latched.
To tilt the seat on vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go
seating, pull forward on the release strap located on the
front of the seat between the seat back and seat cushion
and tilt the seat fully forward. To return the seat, lower
the seat and ensure that it is fully latched.
Tilting Quad Seat
Tilting Stow ’n Go Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
WARNING!
In the event of a collision you could be injured if the
seat is not fully latched.
3
Middle Quad Fold & Tumble Seat Removal
1. Remove any obstructions from the floor in front of the
seat.
2. Lower the head restraint to its full downward position
and ensure that the cupholder is closed.
3. Pull up on the seatback release lever located on the
outboard side of the seat and fold the seatback down. If
the head restraint contacts the rear of the front seat, move
the front seat forward on its tracks.
Seatback Release Lever
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Pull up on the release handle and tumble the seat fully
forward.
Release Bar Location
Seat Release Handle
5. Pull the release bar located at the bottom front edge of
the seat to disengage the front attachments.
6. The seat assembly can now be removed from the
vehicle and moved on its Easy Out威 Rollers.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
To reinstall the seat, remove any obstructions from the
floor in front of the seat and ensure the head restraint is
in its full downward position. Align the seat in the floor
tracks and tilt the seat forward to engage the front floor
attachments, then tilt the seat rearward and push down
to engage the rear attachments. Pull the seatback release
lever to return the seatback to its full upright position.
Ensure that the seatback is fully latched in the upright
position.
50/50 Fold & Tumble Rear Seat Removal
1. Lower the head restraint and pull up on release lever
“1” to fold the seatback down.
3
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Release Lever Location
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull up on release lever “2” and tumble the seat fully
forward.
Release Strap Location
Release Lever 2 Location
3. Pull the release strap “3” located at the bottom of the
seat to disengage the front attachments.
4. The seat assembly can now be removed from the
vehicle and moved on its Easy Out威 Rollers.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
To reinstall the 50/50 rear seat, lower the head restraint to
the full down position, tilt the seat forward and engage
the front floor attachments, then tilt the seat rearward to
engage the rear attachments. Pull the seatback release
lever to return the seatback to its full upright position.
Ensure that the seatback is fully latched in the upright
position.
2 – Passenger and 3 – Passenger Bench Seats
Release levers are located on the rear leg assemblies, near
the floor. To remove the seat, squeeze each release handle
and rotate downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock
indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked. The
seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle and
moved on its Easy Out威 Rollers.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Release Levers
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent positions on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotate
upward until the lock indicator button returns into the
handle.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and
some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of
the bagged goods.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the bench seats could become loose. Personal injuries could result. After
reinstalling these seats, be sure the red indicator
button on the release handles return into the
handles.
Grocery Bag Holders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Rear-Most Bench Seat
The seat position can be adjusted fore and aft to any of
three positions - normal (rearward), intermediate, and
full forward. In this way varying needs for legroom and
cargo space behind the seat can be accommodated.
Release Lever Location
The release lever is below the seat and is accessible from
the front and back of the seat.
Rear Seat Descriptions
7 Passenger Model — 2– passenger bench or bucket seats
in the second position and 3– passenger bench seat or
50/50 bench seat in the third position. All rear seats are
removable.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Bench Seating Flexibility
The 3– passenger bench seat may be adjusted to any of 3
positions on its tracks while installed in the vehicle. The
bench seat may also be moved to the second seating
position or removed from the vehicle.
1. Normal Seating—
The 2nd and 3rd row seats are installed. The 3rd row
bench seat is in the full rear position on the tracks.
2. Increased Storage—
Increased storage area is provided by adjusting 3rd row
bench seat to the intermediate track position. Rear seating for 3 passengers (children) is still provided.
3. Additional Storage—
The 2nd and 3rd row seats installed. The 3rd row bench
seat is in the full forward position on the tracks and one
or both of the rear seatbacks are folded down.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
4. Auxiliary Seating—
The middle quad seats are removed from the vehicle. The
3– passenger bench seat can be installed in either the
second or third row.
3
Rear Quad and 50/50 Seating Flexibility
The seats may be used with either or both seatbacks
folded forward for additional storage space, or with
either or both seats removed from the vehicle. Both 50/50
seats may also be moved to the 2nd row seating position
when the middle quad seats are removed.
1. Normal Seating—
The 2nd and 3rd row seats are installed. Both seatbacks
are in the upright position.
2. Increased Storage—
Increased storage area is provided by folding either or
both seatbacks. With one seatback folded forward, rear
seating for another occupant is still provided. Either or
both seats may Fold and Tumble forward for more
storage space. For maximum storage, remove the head
restraint and place on the seat cushion, then fold the
seatback over the head restraint by lifting lever “1” and
tumble the seat forward by lifting lever “2”.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Driving with the 2nd-row seats in the tumbled position is
not recommended when passengers occupy the 3rd row
seats. This position is intended only to increase available
cargo area without requiring removal of the seats.
Do not leave the head restraint stored between the
cushions for extended periods of time or inadvertent
damage to the seat cover or head restraint may occur.
4. Auxiliary Seating—
The 2nd row seats are removed from the vehicle. Then
the third row seats can be installed in either the rear or
middle seat position.
If the seat is not occupied, the seatback can be folded
forward to obtain additional cargo space. To fold the
seatback forward, pull the handle labeled “1” located
behind the seat on the passenger side.
The seatback will latch in the folded position. To assure
the seatback is latched in the folded position, additional
downward pressure on the seatback may be required
when folding.
3. Additional Storage—
The 2nd row seats are installed in the middle seating
position. Either or both of the rear seats are removed
from the vehicle.
The same lever is used to return the seatback to the
upright position.
NOTE: The head restraints are removable, if needed. To
remove them, press the release tab on the right side of the
base of the head restraint.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
WARNING!
• Not all head restraints in this vehicle are the same.
Head restraints from one seating position should not
be removed and installed in any other seating position. In a collision, serious injury or death may result
if the proper head restraint is not installed on each
seat.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle should not
be used as a play area by children. They could be
seriously injured in a collision. Children should be
seated and using the proper restraint system.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
3
Hood Release Lever
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Next, push to the left the safety catch located under the
front edge of the hood, near the center.
cm (12 inches) and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
Hood Safety Catch
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 30
LIGHTS
All of the lights, except the hazard warning lights, are
controlled by switches to the left of the steering column
on the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
• A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open.
• Any overhead reading light is left on.
• If the dimmer control is in the extreme top position.
NOTE: The key must be out of the ignition switch or the
ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this
feature to operate.
Park Lights
Turn this switch to the first detent to turn the park
lights on. This also turns on all instrument panel
lighting.
Headlight Switch
Interior Lights
Interior lights are turned on when a door or liftgate is
opened, the keyless entry transmitter is activated, or
when the dimmer control is moved to the extreme top.
The interior lights will automatically turn off in about 15
minutes if any of the following occur.
Headlights
Turn the headlight switch to the 2nd detent to
turn the headlights and park lights on. This
also turns on all instrument panel lighting.
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the dimmer control up or down.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dimmer Control
With the park lights or headlights
on, rotating the dimmer control
for the interior lights on the instrument panel upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent (extreme top position) to turn
on the interior lights, except the
front reading/courtesy lights. The
interior lights will remain on
when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the
OFF position (extreme bottom).
The interior lights will remain off
when the doors or liftgate are
open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control to the
first detent. This feature brightens
the odometer, radio and overhead
displays when the park lights or
headlights are on.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns
your headlights ON or OFF based
on ambient light levels. To turn
the system ON, turn the headlight
switch to the extreme counterclockwise position. When the system is ON, the Headlight Time
Delay feature is also ON. This
means your headlights will stay
ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition
switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System OFF, turn the
headlight switch clockwise to the OFF position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come ON in the Automatic mode.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada/Fleet Vehicles
Only)
The Daytime Running Lights will come on whenever the
vehicle is running, the headlights are off, and the parking
brake is off. The headlight switch must be used for
normal night time driving.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights or the park lights are left on, or if the
dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the
ignition switch is turned off, a chime will sound when the
driver’s door is opened.
Battery Protection
This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
down the battery if the headlights, park lights, or front
fog lights are left on for extended periods of time when
the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. After 3
minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK position and the headlight switch in any position other than
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically until
the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition switch is turned to any other position other than
LOCK during the 3 minute delay.
Headlamp Delay — If Equipped
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds, when leaving your vehicle in an
unlighted area.
To activate the delay feature, turn off the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay interval begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
headlights or park lights are turned back on or the
ignition switch is turned on, the delay will be cancelled.
The driver can choose, when exiting the vehicle, to have
the headlamps remain on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds, or not
remain on. refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) “Customer Programmable Features” for more
information.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45
seconds of turning the ignition off to activate this feature.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the park
lights or the low beam headlights and pull out on
the headlight switch control knob. An indicator in
the headlight switch shows that the front fog lights are
on. Pressing the headlight switch control knob in will
turn the front fog lights off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
Turn Signals
Move the Multifunction Lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the base instrument cluster or
Information Center flash to indicate proper operation of
the front and rear turn signal lights. You can signal a lane
change by moving the lever partially up or down.
3
If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a
defective outside turn signal light bulb. If one of the
indicators fails to light when the lever is moved, it would
suggest that the indicator light is defective.
Turn Signal Switch
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about one mile
with the turn signals on, a chime will sound to alert the
driver.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Low/High Beam Selector Switch
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel to
switch the headlights between HIGH and LOW beam.
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the headlights to turn on at
high beam and remain on until the lever is released.
Windshield Wipers and Washers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the lever to select
the desired wiper speed.
NOTE: Always remove any build-up of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to
the OFF position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the OFF
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
To use the washer, press the end of the multifunction
lever in when spray is desired, the washers will spray for
a maximum of 20 seconds or until the lever is released. If
another washer cycle is desired the end of the lever must
be pressed again to get another 20 second washer cycle. If
the lever is depressed while in the delay range, the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
wipers will operate for several seconds after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the end of the lever is depressed while in the OFF
position, the wipers will operate for approximately two
wipe cycles, then turn OFF.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wipers when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable.
Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent position,
then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval. The delay can be regulated from a maximum of
about 20 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every 2
seconds. The time delay will be doubled if the vehicle
speed is less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
To tilt the column, pull the small lever, located behind the
turn signal control, toward you and move the wheel up
or down, as desired. Release the lever to lock the wheel
firmly in place.
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH — IF EQUIPPED
The TRAC indicator, located below the instrument cluster odometer, will light up when the Traction Control is in
use.
Tilt Steering Column Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
To turn the system OFF, press the TRAC OFF switch
located on the steering column, until the TRAC OFF
indicator below the instrument cluster odometer lights
up.
To turn the system back ON, press the switch a second
time until the TRAC OFF indicator turns OFF.
NOTE:
• The Traction Control System indicator comes on each
time the ignition switch is turned ON. This will occur
even if you used the switch to turn the system OFF.
• The Traction Control will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when in operation.
REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system is used to help drivers determine if an
obstacle is in the way of the vehicle while it is backing up
in addition to the use of inside rearview and outside
mirrors.
Traction Control Switch
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the driver selects Reverse the system scans for
objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in
the rear bumper. Objects can be detected from up to 59
inches (150cm). A warning display above the rear window provides both visible and audible warnings indicating the range of the object.
Rear Park Assist Indicator
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist System. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure
to do so can result in serious personal injury or death.
The display contains two sets of yellow and red LEDs
that the driver can see in the rear view mirror. Each side
of the vehicle has its own warning LEDs. The system
provides a visual warning by illuminating one or more
yellow LEDs as the vehicle gets closer to the object. As
the vehicle continues to approaches the object, one red
LED is illuminated and the system emits a series of short
beeps. The tone will remain constant and both red LEDs
are illuminated once the vehicle is within 12 inches (30.5
cm) of the object.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
The system can be turned on or off through the electronic
vehicle information center (EVIC) when the vehicle is in
PARK. If the rear park assist system is turned off, a single
chime will sound and the EVIC will display the following
message “PARK ASSIST DISABLED”, when the vehicle is
in reverse.
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
to keep the system operating properly.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals
to move toward or away from the driver to provide
improved position with the steering wheel. The adjustable
pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of driver
comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. The
switch is located on the right side of the steering column.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the system.
If Service Park Assist System appears in the EVIC after
making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your
authorized dealer.
Adjustable Pedal Switch
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the button forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
CAUTION!
Press the button rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become
limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in
the adjustable pedal’s path.
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R
(Reverse) or when the Speed Control System is ON.
The following messages will be displayed on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted
when the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal
Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 30 mph (50 km/h).
To Activate:
Push the “ON/OFF” button once and the CRUISE indicator located below the instrument cluster odometer will
illuminate showing the electronic speed control system is
on. To turn the system OFF, push the “ON/OFF” button
again and the system and indicator will turn off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidently
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.
Speed Control Switches
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set At A Desired Speed:
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the “SET” button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the “CANCEL”
button or normal braking while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the speed control without erasing the set
speed memory. Pushing the “ON/OFF” button to the
OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the set
speed memory.
To Resume Speed:
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
“RESUME/ACCEL” button. Resume can be used at any
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Vary the Speed Setting:
When the speed control is set, speed can be increased by
pressing and holding the “RESUME/ACCEL” button.
When the button is released, a new set speed will be
established.
Tapping the “RESUME/ACCEL” button once will result
in a 2 mph (3 km/h) speed increase. Each time the button
is tapped, speed increases so that tapping the button
three times will increase speed by 6 mph (10 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while speed control is set, press and
hold the “COAST” button. Release the button when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
Tapping the “COAST” button once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is tapped,
speed decreases.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
To Accelerate For Passing:
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
WARNING!
Your vehicle will experience a downshift to 3rd gear
while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set
speed.
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
The overhead console can contain courtesy/reading
lights, an optional universal garage door opener
(HomeLink威), storage for sunglasses, compass/
temperature display, a mini-trip computer, optional electronic vehicle information center (EVIC), power sliding
door switches and an optional power liftgate switch.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn these lights on. Press a second time
to turn the lights off.
The lights also turn on when a front door, a sliding door
or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry, the lights will also turn on when
the unlock button on the transmitter is pressed.
The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also
illuminated from a light in the overhead console. This
light is turned on when the headlight switch is on and
will adjust in brightness when the dimmer control is
rotated up or down.
Overhead Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Sunglass Storage
At the rear of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of two pair of sunglasses.
Press the door latch to open the compartment. The door
will slowly rotate to an open position.
Compass/Temperature Display
This display provides the outside temperature and one of
eight compass readings to indicate the direction the
vehicle is facing.
WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above
32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible personal injury or property damage.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the “CAL”
symbol will be displayed. After completing three 360°
turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects,
the “CAL” symbol will turn off and the compass will
function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” symbol
does not appear, you must put the compass into the
Calibration Mode manually.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To put into a Calibration Mode: Turn on the ignition
switch and set the display to Comp/Temp. Press the
RESET button on vehicles equipped with a Compass/
Mini Trip Computer for at least 10 seconds until the
“CAL” symbol appears. On vehicles equipped with
Compass/Temp press and hold the C/T and US/M
buttons for 10 seconds. Release the RESET button and
complete three 360° turns in an area free from large metal
objects. The “CAL” symbol will turn off and the compass
will function normally.
CAUTION!
Do not place any external magnets, such as magnetic
roof mount antennas, in the vicinity of the compass.
Do not use magnetic tools when servicing the overhead console.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the overhead console.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
To set the variance: Turn the ignition switch ON and set
the display to Comp/Temp. On vehicles equipped with a
Compass/Mini Trip Computer press the RESET button
for approximately 5 seconds. On vehicles equipped with
Compass/Temp press and hold the C/T and US/M
buttons for 5 seconds. The “VAR” symbol will light and
the last variance zone number will be displayed. Press
the STEP button on vehicles equipped with a Compass/
Mini Trip Computer or the US/M button on vehicles
equipped with Compass/Temp to select the proper variance zone as shown in the map. Press the RESET button
on vehicles equipped with a Compass/Mini Trip Computer or the C/T button on vehicles equipped with
Compass/Temp to set the new variance zone and resume
normal operation.
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mini-Trip Computer
This displays information on the following:
• Average Fuel Economy (ECO AVG)
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined using the MPG for the last few minutes.
• Trip Odometer (ODO)
Shows the distance travelled since the last reset.
• Elapsed Time (ET)
Shows the accumulated ignition ON time since the last
reset.
• Off Mode
Shows a blank display.
• Step Button
Push this button to cycle through all the Compass/Minitrip Computer displays.
• US/M Button
Press this button to convert the display from U.S. to
metric.
To Reset The Display
Pressing the Reset button once will clear the resettable
function currently being displayed. Resettable functions
are average fuel economy, trip odometer and elapsed
time. Pressing the reset button twice within four seconds
will clear all resettable functions. Reset will only occur if
a resettable function is currently being displayed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center, when the
appropriate conditions exist, displays the following
WARNING messages and symbols. Each message is
accompanied by a single chime:
• TURN SIGNALS ON (with graphic)
• PERFORM SERVICE
• DOOR AJAR (one or more, with graphic)
• LIFTGATE AJAR (with graphic)
• WASHER FLUID LOW (with graphic)
• 1,2,3 OR 4 LOW TIRE(S) PRESSURE (Refer to ”Tire
Pressure Monitor System” in the “Starting And Operating, Tire Section”)
• CHECK TPM SYSTEM (Refer to ”Tire Pressure Monitor System” in the “Starting And Operating, Tire
Section”)
• MEMORY SEAT DISABLED (Not in Park) — If
Equipped
• ADJUSTABLE
GAGED
PEDAL
DISABLED/CRUISE
EN-
• ADJUSTABLE PEDAL DISABLED/VEHICLE IN REVERSE
• REAR PARK ASSIST (Shown in Reverse only with a
single chime) — If Equipped
NOTE: Tire pressure menu items are available only on
vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor System.
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Programmable Features — If Equipped
Press the “MENU” button until one of the display choices
following appears:
Language
When in this display you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
computer functions. Press the “STEP” button while in
this display selects English, Francaise, Deutsch, Italiano,
or Espanol. As you continue the displayed information
will be shown in the selected language.
Rear Park Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the system scans for objects
behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the rear
bumper. Objects can be detected from up to 71 inches
(180 cm). Pressing the “STEP” button while in this
display will disable/enable the Rear Park Assist System.
US or Metric
Pressing the “STEP” button when in this display selects
US or Metric. The overhead console and climate control
displays will be in the selected units.
Service Interval
When this feature is selected a service interval between
2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6,000 miles (9 600 km) in 500
mile (800 km) increments may be selected. Pressing the
“STEP” button when in this display will select distances
between 2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6,000 miles (9 600
km) in 500 mile (800 km) increments.
Reset Service Distance (Displays Only if Service
Interval was Changed)
When this feature is selected the current accumulated
service distance can be reset to the newly selected service
interval. Pressing the “STEP” button when in this display
will select “Yes” or “No.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Use Factory Settings
If “Yes” is selected, all of the customer programmable
features will be set to the factory default and not displayed. If “No” is selected you can program the Vehicle
Information Center to your own personal preferences.
Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors and the liftgate
lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches
18 mph (29 km/h). Pressing the “STEP” button when in
this display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Auto Unlock On Exit (Available Only When the
AUTO DOOR LOCKS Feature is Turned On)
When this feature is selected all the vehicle’s doors will
unlock whenever any door is opened if the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in “P” (Park) or “N”
(Neutral) position. Pressing the “STEP” button when in
this display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st
When this feature is selected only the driver’s door will
unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button and require a second press to unlock the
remaining locked doors and liftgate. When “REMOTE
UNLOCK ALL DOORS” is selected all of the doors and
the liftgate will unlock at the first press of the remote
keyless entry unlock button. Pressing the “STEP” button
when in this display will select “DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST”
or “ALL DOORS”.
Remote Linked To Memory (Available with
Memory Seat and Pedals Only)
When this feature is selected, pressing the Unlock button
on any Remote Keyless Entry transmitter already linked
to memory will return the driver’s seat, driver’s outside
mirror, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals, and
radio station presets to their memory set positions.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If this feature is not selected, the driver’s seat, driver’s
mirror, adjustable pedals, and radio settings can only
return to their memory set positions using the memory
recall buttons (1or 2) on the driver’s door panel.
Any transmitter linked to memory will remain linked,
but will not recall the memory positions. The transmitter
memory recall function will operate again when this
feature is selected. Refer to Driver Memory System for
more information. Pressing the ⬙STEP⬙ button when in
this mode will select between ⬙Yes⬙ or ⬙No⬙.
Sound Horn On Lock
When this feature is selected a short horn sound will
occur when the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is
pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the
flash lights on LOCK/UNLOCK feature. Pressing the
“STEP” button when in this display will select “Yes” or
“No.”
Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock?
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature
may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock
feature selected. Pressing the “STEP” button when in this
display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Sliding Door Open Flash?
When this feature is selected, and the sliding door(s) are
opened, the left and right exterior hazard lights will flash
for 12 seconds to alert other drivers in the area that
passenger(s) could be entering or exiting the vehicle.
Pressing the ⬙STEP⬙ button when in this display will
select “Yes” or “No.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Headlamp Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose, when
exiting the vehicle, to have the headlamps remain on for
30, 60, or 90 seconds, or not remain on. Pressing the
“STEP” button when in this display will select 30, 60, 90,
or “OFF.”
Headlamp On With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is selected and the headlight switch
has been moved to the “AUTO” position, the engine is
running and, the front wipers are turned on for 10
seconds, the headlights will turn ON. The display will
remain on Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) for ease of
viewing. Pressing the “STEP” button when in this display
will select “Yes” or “No.”
Power Accessory Delay
When this feature is selected, accessory power will be
supplied for up to 45 seconds for the power windows,
radio, power vent windows, power outlets, and removable center console, when the ignition switch is turned off
or until the key is removed and either front door is
opened.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Programming HomeLink
NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside the garage. Some vehicles may
require the ignition switch to be turned to the second (or
⬙accessories⬙) position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency
signal.
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and
release only when the indicator light begins to flash (after
20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30
seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two
HomeLink buttons.
3
HomeLink Buttons
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3
inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink
button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with
procedures noted in the ⬙Gate Operator/Canadian Programming⬙ section.
4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from the
slow to the rapid flash.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete and your device
should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed
and released.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
step one.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
then turns to a constant light, continue with ⴖProgrammingⴖ steps 6 - 8 to complete the programming of a
rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage
door opener).
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
in the garage, locate the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button.
(The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step
eight.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button.
Repeat the ⴖpress/hold/releaseⴖ sequence a second time,
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
step one. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to ⬙time-out⬙ (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to ⬙time-out⬙ in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the ⬙Programming⬙ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
ⴖProgramming HomeLinkⴖ step 3 with the following:
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
⬙cycling⬙ process to prevent possible overheating.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release every two seconds (⬙cycle⬙)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
successfully been accepted by HomeLink. (The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly.) Proceed with
⬙Programming⬙ step four to complete.
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the event that
there are still programming difficulties or questions,
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-3553515.
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual
buttons cannot be erased but can be ⬙reprogrammed⬙ note below), follow the step noted:
• Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.
Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30
seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning)
mode and can be programmed at any time beginning
with ⬙Programming⬙ - step 2.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds.
Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with
⬙Programming⬙ step 2
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies
by following the “Erasing HomeLink Buttons” instructions in this section.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof control is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
3
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
Power Sunroof Controls
Press and hold the switch rearward to fully open the
sunroof. The sunroof can be stopped at any position
between closed and full open. Momentarily pressing the
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature,
causing the sunroof to open automatically.
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the switch is pushed forward again.
Press and hold the button located to the right of the
sunroof switch, to open the vent. The sunroof can be
stopped at any position between closed and full vent. To
close the sunroof from the vent position, press and hold
the switch forward. Releasing the switch will stop the
movement of the sunroof and the sunroof will remain in
the partial vent position until the switch is pushed
forward again.
The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open
as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if
the sunroof is open.
Express Open Feature
During the Express Open operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a
partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the
switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature.
To close the sunroof, hold the switch in the forward
position. Again, any release of the switch will stop the
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury
or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
WARNING!
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
properly secured too.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
To the left of the instrument panel cup holder are two 12
volt power outlets. The upper outlet is controlled by the
ignition switch and the lower outlet is connected directly
to the battery. The upper outlet will also operate a
conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped with an
optional Smoker’s Package).
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A third outlet is located on the driver’s side, just to the
rear of the sliding door and is also controlled by the
ignition switch. The lower and rear outlets will not
accommodate a conventional cigar lighter unit.
The outlets include tethered caps labeled with a key or
battery symbol indicating the power source. The lower
instrument panel outlet is powered directly from the
battery, items plugged into this outlet may discharge the
battery and/or prevent engine starting.
The lower outlet is protected by an automatic reset circuit
breaker. The automatic circuit breaker restores power
when the overload is removed. The circuit breaker also
supplies power to the outlet in the removable floor
console, when in the front position. Refer to section 3
“Removable Floor Console” in this manual.
NOTE: If desired, all of the power outlets can be
converted by your authorized dealer to provide power
with the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Rear Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from
the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e. cellular
phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers, vacuum
cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more
quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories
still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the
vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage.
CONVENIENCE TRAY DRAWER AND CUP
HOLDERS
Instrument Panel Cup Holders
The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull out
drawer just below the climate controls.
Front Cupholders
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the drawer is pulled out firmly, the arms of the
cupholders will spring out. Place the container to be held
into one of the cupholders and then push the arm toward
the container until the container is held stable. There are
adjustable positions for the arm so the cupholder can
accommodate a wide variety of container types and sizes,
including those with handles. The arms of the cupholder
can be adjusted in or out without damaging the detent
mechanism.
NOTE: Be sure the drawer is pulled out completely,
otherwise the adjustable arm detents will not engage and
the container will not be held stable.
Convenience Tray And Optional Smoker’s
Package Kit
Located between the instrument panel cupholders is a
convenience tray that has been designed to hold miscellaneous small items.
NOTE: The convenience tray should never be used for
ashes without the optional ash receiver in place. Permanent burn marks may result.
With the optional dealer installed Smoker’s package, a
removable ash receiver is inserted into the convenience
tray location. To install the ash receiver, slide the forward
edge into the convenience tray opening and push down
to lock it into position. For cleaning of the ash receiver, its
removal is accomplished by inserting the end of a key in
the pry slot that is molded into the rear edge of the ash
receiver and then twisting the key slightly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Rear Cupholders
There are dual stationary cupholders located in the
passenger side rear trim panel and a single stationary cup
holder on the driver side rear trim panel.
There are also dual underseat cupholders for the 2nd seat
passengers. With a bench seat in the 2nd seat position
these cupholders slide out from under the center of the
seat.
3
If your vehicle is equipped with quad seats in the 2nd
seat position, these cupholders are located on the outboard side of the seat pedestal.
Quad Seat Cupholder
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The quad seat cupholders will remain upright if the
seat is tilted forward.
• The quad seat cupholders are designed to break away
if stepped on. To return the cupholder to its normal
position, simply push the cupholder up to snap it into
place.
STORAGE
Front Seat Storage Bin — If Equipped
The storage bin is located under the front passenger’s
seat. If equipped with a lock, it can be locked with the
ignition key.
• The floor mat must be in position for optimum cupholder operation.
There are also two cupholders and a flat tray on the seat
back of the quad seats. These can be used when the seat
back is folded forward.
Front Seat Storage Bin
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Second Row Seat Storage bins — If Equipped
The Seat Storage Bins are located on the floor in front of
the second row seats, the area below the covers can be
used for storage when the second row seat is in the
upright position.
Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide
the storage bin locking mechanism to the ⬙Unlocked⬙
position to allow greater access to the storage bin.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched. Do not
drive the vehicle with the storage bin cover open.
Keep the storage bin cover closed and latched while
the vehicle is in motion. Do not operate the storage
bin cover while the vehicle is in motion.
Storage Bin Cover
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overhead Rail System — If Equipped
The overhead rail system contains provisions for three
movable and removable overhead storage bins. The
storage bins may be placed anywhere on the overhead
rail system.
CAUTION!
Do not load objects over 1.5 lbs (0.68 kg) in the
storage bins. Failure to follow this could cause
damage to the Overhead Rail System.
To Remove Storage Bins
1. Support the bin with one hand and pull the latch
handles out.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
2. Twist the latch handles a 1⁄4 turn and pull outward to
disengage the bin from the rail.
To reinstall the storage bins, place the bin in the desired
location on the overhead rail, push firmly upward on the
bin with one hand, while pushing in on the latch handle,
twist a 1⁄4 turn to attach the bin to the rail. Push the latch
handle down to lock the storage bin in place.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if the storage bins are not properly latched to
the Overhead Rail System. Always be sure the
storage bins are fully latched.
3. Remove the storage bin.
NOTE: Make sure the latch handle pops out before
removing the storage bin.
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Removable Floor Console With Fold-in-Floor
Seating — If Equipped
The removable floor console has a two power outlets,
storage tray, light, removable cell phone holder, tissue
holder, pen holder and a map holder. It can be removed
from the vehicle by pulling the release handle inside the
floor console.
To remove the console use the following procedure:
1. Open the console lid and remove the storage tray.
2. Pull up on the release handle located inside the floor
console, and slide the console rearward to disengage
from the floor.
Release Handle
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
3. Remove the floor console.
Cell Phone Holder Removal
To reinstall the console, open the console lid and remove
the storage tray. Pull up on the release handle and slide
the console forward to engage the front of the console
into the floor tray. Pivot the floor console down until it is
seated on the floor tray and release the handle. Pull up on
the console to be sure it is firmly attached.
1. Open the floor console lid and lift the cell phone
holder upward.
WARNING!
Removable Floor Console Without Fold-in-Floor
Seating — If Equipped
The removable floor console has a power outlet, storage
tray, light, cell phone holder, tissue holder, and a map
holder. It can be placed between either the front seats or
middle seats.
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
2. Squeeze the legs together to disengage the holder from
the floor console and remove the cell phone holder.
To reinstall the cell phone holder, align the pivot legs into
the guides and push forward to snap the legs into place.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When the console is located between the front
seats the outlet is protected by an automatic circuit
breaker and is powered directly from the battery, items
plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery
and/or prevent engine starting.
To remove the console use the following procedure:
1. Open the rear lid and remove the storage tray.
2. Pull up on the release handle located inside the floor
console to disengage the floor console, reinstall the
storage tray and close the rear lid.
Removable Floor Console
Release Handle
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
3. Using the front and rear grab handles, slide the
console rearward to disengage the front of the console
and lift up to remove the console from the floor.
NOTE: When the removable floor console is located
between the middle seats, the power outlet only has
power supplied to it when the ignition switch is ON.
4. Place the rubber mat on the floor tray.
Cell Phone Holder
To reinstall the console, remove the rubber mat and
relocate to the alternate floor tray, slide the console
forward to engage the front of the console into the floor
tray. Rapidly push down on the rear of the console with
enough force to engage the latch, you should hear the
latch “snap” into place. Pull up on the console to be sure
it is firmly attached.
1. Open the front lid and remove the cell phone holder by
pulling rearward and up on the lower edge of the holder.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed. Always be
sure the removable floor console is fully latched.
Cell Phone Holder
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Plug in the power cord for the cellular phone into the
outlet located in the bottom of the forward console bin
and reinstall the cell phone holder.
3. Place the cell phone into the holder.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Rear Compartment Storage Bins
Your vehicle may be equipped with open storage bins
located in each rear trim panel.
Cargo/Tub Nets
Two cargo/tub nets are available on vehicles equipped
with Fold-in-Floor Seating. The cargo nets fit in the
second row storage bin and the third row tub. The nets
are supported by hooks located in these areas. Refer to
instructions provided in the net kit.
Coat Hooks
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit
is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit
can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
Cargo Area Storage
The seats in your vehicle are in-line which enables you to
stow long objects, such as lumber or skis, on the floor
without moving the seats.
NOTE: With all rear seat backs folded, a 4x8 foot sheet
of building material may be stored in the long-wheelbase
body style on top of the folded seats with the liftgate
closed. The front seats must be moved slightly forward of
the rearmost position. If the rear seats are removed no
front seat adjustment is needed and more than one 4x8
sheet of building material may be stored.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement
“Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearward
cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate
closing.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 68 kg (150 lbs), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
Loading Limit
Roof Rack
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the cross bars, loosen the thumb screws located
at the upper edge of each cross bar approximately six
turns, then move the cross bar to the desired position,
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the
cross bar is in place, retighten the thumb screws to lock
the cross bar into position.
Attempt to move the crossbar again to ensure that it has
properly locked into position.
NOTE: To help control wind noise when installing the
cross bars make sure that the arrows marked on the front
side of the cross bars are facing the front of the vehicle.
Also, when the cross bars are not in use the notch on the
cross bars should be aligned with the arrows on the side
rails. This will help reduce the amount of wind noise
when the crossbars are not in use.
The tie down holes on the cross bar ends should always
be used to tie down the load. Check the straps frequently
to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Crossbars should remain equally spaced or parallel at
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in
personal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof
Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
any luggage rack position for proper function. Noncompliance could result in damage to the luggage rack,
cargo and/or vehicle.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 68 kg
(150 lbs). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such as
wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large frontal
area should be secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to loads. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
WARNING!
Do not install the load leveling system on vehicles
that are not equipped with Anti-Lock Brakes. Vehicles without Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) have a
height-sensing proportioning valve. Installing a leveling system will render this system ineffective,
inappropriately reducing rear brake pressure, resulting in increased stopping distances. You could have
an accident.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
䡵 Base Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
䡵 Instrument Cluster With Tach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
䡵 Sales Code RAZ—AM/ FM Stereo Radio With
Cassette Tape Player, CD Player And CD Changer
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
䡵 Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
䡵 Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Power Switch, Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Seek Button (Radio Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Radio Data System (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Tape Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ PTY (Program Type) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Changing Tape Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Metal Tape Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Tone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Pinch Roller Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ AM/FM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Operating Instructions — CD Player . . . . . . . . 220
▫ To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory . . . . . . 218
▫ Inserting The Compact Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ To Change From Clock To Radio Mode . . . . . . 218
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Operating Instructions — Tape Player . . . . . . . 218
▫ EJT CD (Eject) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ FF/Tune/RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Fast Forward (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Program Button 4 (Random Play) . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Rewind (RW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
▫ Tape CD Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Time Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ CD Changer Control Capability —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
䡵 Sales Code Rev AM & FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player And CD/DVD Changer Controls . . . . 224
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ CD/DVD Changer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Operation Instructions (CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . 233
䡵 Sales Code RBP—AM & FM Stereo Radio With
Cassette Tape Player, CD Player, And Optional
CD/DVD Changer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Tape Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ CD/DVD Changer Operation —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
䡵 Sales Code RBQ—AM/FM Stereo Radio With 6 Disc CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
䡵 Sales Code RBK—AM/ FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player And CD Changer Controls . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
4
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Prog Up/Down Buttons (10, 11) . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ CD Changer Control Capability —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Slow Button (12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
䡵 Sales Code RB1—AM/FM Stereo Radio With
DVD/GPS Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
䡵 Remote Control Operating Instructions . . . . . . . 258
▫ Headphone Transmitter Button (1) . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Arrow Buttons (2, 3, 15, 16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Rtn Button (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Setup Button (5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Pause/Play Button (6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Mute Button (7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Disp Button (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Mode Button (9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Stop Button (13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Menu Button (14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Next/Prev Buttons (2, 15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ FF/RW Buttons (3, 16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Enter Button (17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Light Button (18) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Remote Control Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Operating Instructions — Video Screen . . . . . . 262
▫ Operating Instructions — Headphones . . . . . . 264
▫ Operating Instructions — MP3 Player,
Portable Walkman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
▫ Operating Instructions — Video
Games/Camcorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ENS/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In RBB, Rev And
RBK Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In RBP, RBU, RAZ,
RB1 And RBQ Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 269
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . . 270
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
䡵 Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance . . . . . . . 272
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 274
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
4
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Front Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Manual Air Conditioning Operation . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Manual Rear Zone Climate Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Automatic Temperature Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Intermittent Rear Wiper Operation —
Manual Temperature Control Only . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Rear Washer Operation —
Manual Temperature Control Only . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ Rear Wiper Operation —
Automatic Temperature Control Only . . . . . . . 298
▫ Intermittent Rear Wiper Operation —
Automatic Temperature Control Only . . . . . . . 298
▫ Rear Washer Operation —
Automatic Temperature Control Only . . . . . . . 298
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
4
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WITH TACH
4
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
2. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
3. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0
gallons (11.0 liters) this light will turn on and
remain on until fuel is added.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled about one mile with the turn signals on, a chime
will sound to alert you to turn the signals off. If either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
5. Liftgate Ajar
This light turns on if the liftgate is not completely closed.
6. Door Ajar Light
This light turns on if a door is not completely
closed.
7. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
8. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, there
is a low brake fluid level or there is a problem with the
anit-lock brake system.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed.
4
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approximately four seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
9. Airbag Light
This light turns on and remains on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
10. Anti-Lock Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
11. Tachometer — If Equipped
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions-per-minute (r.p.m. x 1000) for each
gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the
accelerator.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
12. Voltage Light
This light monitors the electrical system voltage.
The light should turn on momentarily as the
engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on while
driving, it indicates a problem with the charging system.
Immediate service should be obtained.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer. (See page 315 for
more information.)
13. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check.
During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or
when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled,
the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on
4
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
continuously. Refer to ⬙Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert™)⬙ in the Occupant Restraints
section for more information.
14. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine is critically hot, a continuous
chime will sound for 4 minutes. After the chime
turns off, the engine will still be critically hot until the
light turns off.
15. Vehicle Theft Alarm Light — If Equipped
This light will flash for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming.
(See page 26 for more information.)
16. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads (H),
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call for service.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
WARNING!
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
Park.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
Cap paragraph.
19. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The light
should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for 4 minutes when this light turns on.
17. Washer Fluid Light
This light turns on when the washer fluid level
falls below approximately 1/4 filled. The light will
remain on until fluid is added.
18. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transaxle gear
selection.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
20. High Beam Light
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the turn signal lever towards the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low
beam.
4
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
21. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
called OBD that monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine
start. If the bulb does not come when turning the key
from OFF to ON, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert to serious
conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or
severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced as soon as possible if this occurs. (See page 399
for more information.)
22. Trac Off Indicator — If Equipped
This display indicator should illuminate for approximately four seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON.
The “TRAC OFF” Indicator will flash if the traction
control is in use.
The “TRAC OFF” Indicator will illuminate if:
• The Traction Control switch has been used to turn
the system OFF.
• There is a Traction Control System malfunction
• The system has been deactivated to prevent damage
to the brake system due to overheated brake temperatures.
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the TRAC and
the OFF indicators located in the instrument cluster.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is
a normal condition. The system will remain disabled for
about 4 minutes until the brakes have cooled. The system
will automatically reactivate and turn off the TRAC and
the OFF indicators.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, ice, or snow, turn
the Traction Control System OFF before attempting to
“rock” the vehicle free.
23. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometer, press the Trip
Odometer button.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged,
GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster
odometer. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the odometer reset button to turn the GASCAP message
off. If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. See Section 7 of this
manual for more information.
24. Cruise Indicator
This display indicator shows that the Speed Control
System is ON.
4
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
25. Trip Odometer Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
trip odometer. The word TRIP will appear when in the
trip odometer mode.
Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the
trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer
must be in trip mode to reset.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the time in hours and
minutes whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position and the time button is pressed.
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, or when
the radio frequency is being displayed, time keeping is
accurately maintained.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position
and press the time button. Using the tip of a ballpoint pen
or similar object, press either the hour (H) or minute (M)
buttons on the radio.
2. Press the H button to set hours or the M button to set
minutes. The time setting will increase each time you
press a button.
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
you understand and save you concern about these “apparent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
NOTE: On vehicles so equipped the radio, steering
wheel radio controls and 6 disc CD/DVD changer will
remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition
switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
4
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RAZ—AM/ FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER, CD PLAYER
AND CD CHANGER CONTROLS
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower left
side of your radio faceplate.
RAZ Radio
Operating Instructions — Radio
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is controlled by the
ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position to
operate the radio.
Power Switch, Volume Control
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume. The
volume will be displayed and continuously updated
while the button is pressed.
Seek Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the Seek button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. Holding
the button will by pass stations until you release the
button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
Tuning
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The Radio Data System allows radio broadcasting stations to send data signals on a subcarrier frequency
which is added to the stereo signal. RDS was developed
to give FM receivers user-friendly features, such as
Program Service name (PS) and Program Type (PTY).
Program Service name is typically used by the broadcaster to display the station’s name or call letters, for
example ⬙WNIC⬙. Typically these are 8 characters in
length and are displayed by the radio for those stations
which are broadcasting this information. PTY (Program
Type) is used to characterize the station’s program material, for example ⬙Rock Music⬙.
PTY (Program Type) Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Radio Display
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
4
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Country
Information
Jazz
Foreign Language
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Radio Display
Country
Inform
Jazz
Language
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Program Type
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Radio Display
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last preset station.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
Pressing PTY, then SCAN will scan the FM Band and stop
at all RDS stations. Each RDS station will be played for a
5 second scan once around the FM Band and stop at the
last station. The PTY icon will then turn off.
Balance
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker balance. Push in the button and it will pop out. Adjust the
balance and push the button back in. The balance will be
displayed and continuously updated while the button is
turned.
Fade
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Push in the button and it will pop out.
Adjust the balance and push the button back in. The fade
will be displayed and continuously updated while the
button is turned.
Tone Control
Slide the Bass and/or Treble controls up or down to
adjust the sound for the desired tone. The treble, and bass
will be displayed and continuously updated while the
slide is moved.
AM/FM Selection
Press the AM/FM button to change from AM to FM. The
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
Scan Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the
next station, in either AM or FM, pausing for 5 seconds at
each listenable station before continuing to the next.
Pressing the AM/FM button continues the search in the
alternate frequency band.
To stop the search, press SCAN a second time.
4
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To Set The Radio Push-button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
push-button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a station is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the
stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the pushbutton twice.
To Change From Clock To Radio Mode
Press the Time button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
Operating Instructions — Tape Player
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
right and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
Fast Forward (FF)
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
opposite direction.
Rewind (RW)
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.
Tape Eject
Press the EJT Tape button and the cassette will disengage
and eject from the radio.
Scan Button
Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.
Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.
Changing Tape Direction
If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side
being played), press the PTY button. The lighted arrow in
the display window will show the new direction.
Metal Tape Selection
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the
player will automatically select the correct equalization
and the 70 symbol will appear in the display window.
4
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pinch Roller Release
If ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch are turned
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
Noise Reduction
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the
tape player is on, but may be switched off.
To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press the
Dolby button (button 2) after you insert the tape. The NR
light in the display will go off when the Dolby System is
off. The Dolby System is automatically reactivated each
time a tape is inserted.
* ”Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Operating Instructions — CD Player
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD player
will operate.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3⁄4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
Inserting The Compact Disc
The CD player contained within the radio is not a
multi-disc changer, and will only accept one CD. Gently
insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing
up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch from
radio to CD mode and begin to play. The display will
show the track number and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track one.
NOTE:
• You may eject a disc with the radio OFF. The ignition
switch must be in the ON or ACC position to insert a
disc with the radio OFF.
• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player and the display will show the time of day. If
you insert a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will
show the time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
Seek Button
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first 10 seconds of the current selection.
EJT CD (Eject) Button
Press this button and the disc will unload and move to
the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to the
radio mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.
4
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Program Button 4 (Random Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on the selected disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press
the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward
feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press button 4 a second time to stop Random Play.
MODE
Press the MODE button to select between the tape player,
CD player, or satellite radio (if equipped).
To select Satellite Radio (if equipped), press the MODE
button until the word SIRIUS appears. The following will
be displayed in this order: After three seconds, the
current channel name and number will be displayed for
five seconds. The current program type and channel
number will then be displayed for five seconds. The
current channel name and number will then be displayed
until an action occurs. A CD or tape may remain in the
player while in the Satellite Radio mode.
Tape CD Button
Press this button to select between CD player and Tape
player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
Time Button
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day.
Disc Down/Program Button 5
Press the DISC down (button 5) button to play the
previous disc.
Scan Button
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The following instructions are for the radio controls that operate
this CD changer.
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
hold the RW button for fast reverse.
Mode Button
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until
CD information appears on the display.
Disc Up/Program Button 1
Press the DISC up (button 1) button to play the next
available disc.
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
fast reverse are activated.
Random Play (RND)
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of
pace.
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.
4
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
SALES CODE REV AM & FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER AND CD/DVD CHANGER
CONTROLS
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower left
side of your radio faceplate.
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
• Excessive vibration
• Disc inserted upside down
• Damaged disc
• Water condensation on optics
REV Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
PTY (Program Type)
Pressing the INFO button once while in FM mode will
turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds. If no action is taken
during the 5 second time out, the PTY icon will turn off.
Pressing the TUNE button within 5 seconds will allow
the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
Toggle the TUNE button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Information
Jazz
Foreign Language
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Radio Display
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Inform
Jazz
Language
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
4
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Radio Display
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM and Satellite (if
equipped) modes.
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last preset station.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Mode
Press the MODE button to select between, AM, FM, CD,
CD/DVD changer or the Satellite Radio (if equipped).
When the Satellite Radio (if equipped) is selected “SA”
will appear in your radio display.
A disc may remain in the radio while in the Satellite or
radio mode.
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM, FM or Satellite mode. Press the
top of the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down.
The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button in will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
Tuning
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed.
Balance
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker balance. Press the AUDIO button, select BALANCE, then
press SEEK + or SEEK ⫺ to adjust the balance.
Fade
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Press the AUDIO button, select FADE,
then press SEEK + or SEEK ⫺ to adjust the fade balance.
Tone Control
The Bass and/or Treble controls sound for the desired
tone. Press the AUDIO button, select Bass or TREBLE,
then press SEEK + or SEEK ⫺ to increase or decrease
amplification of the band.
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
push-button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a station is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
4
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the
stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the pushbutton twice.
To Change From Clock To Radio Mode
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CD Player Operation
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD
player will operate.
• This Radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
Inserting The Compact Disc
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept only 4–3/4 inch (12cm)
discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage
the CD player mechanism.
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the time of day. If you insert
a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will show the
time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The
display will show the track number and index time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track
one.
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first 10 seconds of the current selection.
EJT — Eject
Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move
to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to
the radio mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
4
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RND — Random Play
Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press
the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward
feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
CD/DVD Changer Operation
Press the MODE button to select between the CD player
and the optional remote CD/DVD changer.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD or DVD playing time to time of day.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported media (disc types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Supported medium formats (file systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 file formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
4
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Audio
Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing the SEEK + button plays the next MP3 File.
Pressing the SEEK ⫺ button plays the beginning of the
MP3 file. Pressing the button within the first ten seconds
plays the previous file.
INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press and INFO button while playing MP3 disc. The
radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
RW/FF (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection. Press the RW side of the button to
move back through the MP3 selection.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
DIR Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press the DIR Button to display folders, when playing an
MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure. Press DISC
up (button 1) or DISC down (button 5) to move through
the folders. Press the SET button to select a folder
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner’s
Manual.
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES威) (If Equipped)
Refer to 6 Disc CD/DVD Changer Manual.
SALES CODE RBP—AM & FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER, CD PLAYER,
AND OPTIONAL CD/DVD CHANGER CONTROLS
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower left
side of your radio faceplate.
RBP Radio
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control to the right to increase the volume.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
PTY (Program Type) Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Radio Display
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Program Type
Country
Information
Jazz
Foreign Language
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Radio Display
Country
Inform
Jazz
Language
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Radio Display
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM and Satellite (if
equipped) modes.
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last preset station.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Pressing PTY, then SCAN will scan the FM Band and stop
at all RDS stations that broadcast the station type. Each
RDS station will be played for a 5 second scan once
around the FM Band and stop at the last station. The PTY
icon will then turn off.
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button in will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.
Scan
Press and release the SCAN button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. The radio will
pause for 5 seconds at each listenable station before
continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the
SCAN button a second time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Tune
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed.
Balance — BAL
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker balance. Press the BAL button in and it will pop out. Adjust
the balance and push the button back in.
Fade
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Press the FADE button in and it will
pop out. Adjust the balance and push the button back in.
Tone Control
The tone controls affect the BASS and TREBLE frequency
bands. Each is controlled by a slider control with a detent
at the mid position. Moving a control up or down
increases or decreases amplification of the band. The mid
position provides a balanced output.
AM/FM Selection
Press the AM/FM button to toggle between AM and FM
mode. The operating mode will be displayed next to the
station frequency. The display will show “ST” when a
stereo station is received (FM only).
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the
“1–5” button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a button is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the push-button twice.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
To set the clock, use a ballpoint pen or similar object to
press the hour (H) or minute (M) buttons on the radio,
The time setting will increase each time you press the
button. Press any other button to exit from the clock
setting mode.
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Tape Player Operation
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
right and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
Tape Side — ⵜ⌬/PTY
Pressing the ⵜ⌬ button during tape mode will cause the
other side of the tape to be played. The display will
confirm the selected tape play direction. The time is
always displayed.
Tape
Press the TAPE button to select the Tape mode.
Seek
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 7 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc. the display will show the total
number of times the SEEK button was pushed. The SEEK
function will be cancelled by pressing either the FF/RW
or AM/FM button.
Fast Forward — FF
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
opposite direction.
Rewind — RW
Press the RW button down momentarily to reverse the
tape direction. The tape will rewind until the button is
pressed again or until the beginning of the tape is
reached. At the beginning of the tape, the tape will play
in the opposite direction.
4
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EJT Tape
Press the EJT TAPE button and the cassette will disengage and eject from the radio.
Metal Tape Selection (70µs)
If a standard 70 µ (metal) tape is inserted into the player,
the player will automatically select the correct equalization.
Pinch Roller Release
If ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch are turned
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
Dolby Noise Reduction
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the tape player is on, but may be switched
on/off.
To turn the Dolby Noise Reduction System on/off: Press
the Dolby NR button (button 2) after you insert the tape.
The NR light in the display will go off when the Dolby
System is off.
* ”Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
CD Player Operation
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD player
will operate.
Inserting The Compact Disc
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio off,
the display will show CD and the time of day will be
displayed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
If the power is on, the unit will switch from radio to CD
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The
display will show the track number and index time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track
one.
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first second of the current selection.
Scan
Press the SCAN button to play 10 seconds of each
selection. Press the SCAN button a second time to cancel
this feature.
EJT CD
Press the EJT CD button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will
switch to the radio mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The unit will continue in radio mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition off.
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Random Play — RND/Program Button 4
Press the RND (button 4) button while the CD is playing
to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections
on the compact disc in random order to provide an
interesting change of pace.
4
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the top of the SEEK button to move to the next
randomly selected track.
Press the RND (button 4) button a second time to stop
Random Play.
MODE
Press the MODE button to select between the CD player,
remote CD/DVD changer (if equipped), or satellite radio
(if equipped).
To select Satellite Radio (if equipped), press the MODE
button until the word SIRIUS™ appears. The following
will be displayed in this order: After three seconds, the
current channel name and number will be displayed for
five seconds. The current program type and channel
number will then be displayed for five seconds. The
current channel name and number will then be displayed
until an action occurs. A CD or tape may remain in the
player while in the Satellite Radio mode.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.
CD/DVD Changer Operation — If Equipped
MODE
Press the MODE button to select between the CD player,
and the CD/DVD changer (if equipped).
Disc Up/Program Button 1
Press the DISC (button 1) button to play the next available disc.
Random Play — RND/Program Button 4
Press the RND (button 4) button while the CD is playing
to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections
on the currently playing compact disc in random order to
provide an interesting change of pace.
Press the top of the SEEK button to move to the next
randomly selected track.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
Press the RND (button 4) button a second time to stop
Random Play.
FF/RW — TUNE
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
hold the RW button for fast reverse. The audio output can
be heard when fast forward and fast reverse are activated.
Disc Down/Program Button 5
Press the DISC (button 5) button to play the previous
disc.
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first second of the current selection.
Time
Press the TIME button to switch between time of day and
CD track time.
Scan
Press the SCAN button to play 10 seconds of each track.
Press the SCAN button a second time to cancel the
feature.
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RBQ—AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH 6 - DISC CD CHANGER
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower left
side of your radio faceplate.
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the PWR/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn
the volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is controlled by the
ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position to
operate the radio.
Mode
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between AM,
FM, the CD changer and Sirius Satellite Radio™ (if
equipped). The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
RBQ Radio
To select Sirius Satellite Radio™ (if equipped), press the
MODE button until the word SIRIUS appears. The following will be displayed in this order: After three seconds, the current channel name and number will be
displayed for five seconds. The current program type and
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
channel number will then be displayed for five seconds.
The current channel name and number will then be
displayed until an action occurs. CD’s may remain in the
player while in the Satellite Radio mode.
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button in will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.
Tune
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If the button is pressed and held,
the radio will continue to tune until the button is
released. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed.
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET RND
button. SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
“1–6” button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a button is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET RND button, the station
will continue to play but will not be locked into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the corresponding push-button twice. Every
time a preset button is used, a corresponding button
number will be displayed.
4
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio
The audio button controls the BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and FADE.
Time Button
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed.
Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or decrease the
Bass tones.
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
Press the AUDIO button a second time and TREB will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or
decrease the Treble tones.
Press the AUDIO button a third time and BAL will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the
sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
CD Player Operation
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the Power / Volume control pushed ON
before the CD player will operate.
Inserting The Compact Disc
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3⁄4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the time of day. If you insert
a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will show the
time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
LOAD/ EJT — Load
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the button with the
corresponding number where the CD is being loaded.
After the radio displays “load” insert the CD into the
player.
Radio display will show “loading” when it is being
loaded.
LOAD / EJT — Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the button with the
corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the
disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy
removal.
4
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio display will show “ejecting” when it is being
ejected.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD. If the CD is removed and
there are no other CD’s in the radio, the radio will return
to the last selected AM or FM mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first second of the current selection.
Scan
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Random Play — SET / RND
Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on the disc in
random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press the SET / RND button a second time to stop
Random Play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
PTY (Program Type) Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button
repeatedly within 5 seconds will allow the program
format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not
currently broadcast PTY information.
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Emergency
Emergency Test
Radio Display
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
ALERT!
Test
Program Type
Information
Jazz
Foreign Language
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Radio Display
Inform
Jazz
Language
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
4
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Radio Display
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last station.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
By pressing the SCAN button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will stop at every PTY station on the
band and list each corresponding program type in the
radio display.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
CD ERROR will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
SALES CODE RBK—AM/ FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER AND CD CHANGER
CONTROLS
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower left
side of your radio faceplate.
4
• Warped disc
• Excessive vibration
• Disc inserted upside down
• Damaged disc
• Water condensation on optics
RBK Radio
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up or the bottom to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding the button in will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Tune
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed.
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the “1–5”
button you wish to lock onto this station and press and
release that button. If a button is not selected within 5
seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the push-button twice. Every time a preset
button is used a corresponding button number will be
displayed.
Audio
The audio button controls the BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and FADE.
Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the
sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed.
Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or decrease the
Bass tones.
AM/FM Selection
Press the AM/FM button to change from AM to FM. The
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
Press the AUDIO button a second time and TREB will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or
decrease the Treble tones.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
Press the AUDIO button a third time and BAL will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CD Player Operation
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD player
will operate.
Inserting The Compact Disc
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3⁄4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the time of day.
If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The
display will show the track number and index time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track
one.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first second of the current selection.
EJT — Eject
Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move
to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to
the radio mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The unit will continue in radio mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF
(except on convertibles).
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Random Play — RND/Program Button 4
Press the RND (button 4) button while the CD is playing
to activate Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on
the selected disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press the RND (button 4) button a second time to stop
Random Play.
Mode
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, the optional remote CD changer and the Satellite Radio (if equipped). When Satellite Radio (if equipped)
is selected “SAT” will appear in your radio display.
A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the
Satellite mode.
4
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The following instructions are for the radio controls that operate
this CD changer.
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
hold the RW button for fast reverse.
Mode Button
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until
CD information appears on the display.
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
fast reverse are activated.
Random Play (RND)
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the selected
disc in random order for an interesting change of pace.
Disc Up/Program Button 1
Press the DISC up (button 1) button to play the next
available disc.
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.
Disc Down/Program Button 5
Press the DISC down (button 5) button to play the
previous disc.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
SALES CODE RB1—AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH DVD/GPS NAVIGATION SYSTEM
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
4
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
• Excessive vibration
• Disc inserted upside down
• Damaged disc
• Water condensation on optics
RB1 Radio
The navigation system provides maps, turn identification,
selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of
destinations and routes. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If your vehicle is not equipped with the CD
Changer option, you will not be able to use the Navigation system and the CD Player simultaneously. Always
remove the Navigation DVD before inserting another
disc.
Remote Control Operating Instructions
NOTE: Aim the remote control at the radio located on
the center of the instrument panel and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or objects blocking the line of
sight may affect the function of the remote control.
Remote Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
Remote Control Buttons
1. Headphone Transmitter
2. Menu Up/Next Track/Chapter
3. Menu Left/Fast Rewind
4. Return
5. Setup
6. Pause/Play
7. Mute
8. Display
9. Mode
10. Program Down - Previous Disc
11. Program Up - Next Disc
12. Slow
13. Stop
14. Menu
15. Menu Down/Previous Track/Chapter
16. Menu Right/Fast Forward
Remote Control Buttons
17. Enter
18. Light
Headphone Transmitter Button (1)
The headphone transmitter button on the remote control
and the power button on the headphones must be turned
ON before sound can be heard from the headphones. On
some radios the headphone symbol will flash for approximately 5 seconds in the radio display, indicating the
headphones are in use.
ARROW Buttons (2, 3, 15, 16)
These arrow buttons only function in CD/ DVD mode.
Use the arrow buttons to toggle through the disc menu
screen options.
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RTN Button (4)
This button only functions in CD/DVD mode. Press this
button to return to the previous menu when in the disc
menu mode.
PAUSE/PLAY Button (6)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button once to pause the video, press a second time to
play the video.
SETUP Button (5)
This button only functions in CD/DVD mode. Press the
button after pressing the STOP button to access the set up
menu. Use the right and left arrows to move between
tabs for language, rating, mark, audio and aspect. Use the
up and down arrows to move between options within
each tab.
MUTE Button (7)
No function.
To change an item highlighted in blue, press ENTER. This
should cause the highlight to turn yellow. Again, using
the up and down arrows will cause the arrow to move up
or down. Once the arrow is on the desired selection, press
ENTER. When finished, press setup or play to return to
playing the CD/DVD or Menu to return to the disc
menu.
DISP Button (8)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. When a
DVD video is playing, press this button to display the
play menu options.
MODE Button (9)
This button changes between available modes and can be
heard in the headphones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
PROG UP/DOWN Buttons (10, 11)
PROG UP selects the next disc loaded in the changer.
PROG DOWN selects the previous disc loaded in the
changer.
SLOW Button (12)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button to advance the video. If the DVD is paused,
pressing this button will advance the video frame by
frame.
STOP Button (13)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button to stop the DVD.
MENU Button (14)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button to select the DVD disc menu.
NEXT/PREV Buttons (2, 15)
Press the up arrow or the NEXT button for the next
chapter or track on the disc. Press the down arrow or
PREV button to return to the beginning of the current
chapter or track. Press the down arrow or PREV button
twice within two seconds to return to the previous
chapter or track. Each press of the NEXT/PREV button
up or down will toggle through the chapters or tracks.
FF/RW Buttons (3, 16)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) once and the CD/DVD
changer will begin to fast forward until the FF button is
released. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar
manner.
ENTER Button (17)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Use the
ENTER button to enter selections from the menu screens.
Use the arrow buttons to toggle through the menu screen
options.
4
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Light Button (18)
Pressing this button illuminates the buttons on the remote control.
Remote Control Battery Service
• To replace the batteries for the remote control slide the
cover rearward.
The replacement batteries for the remote control are two
AAA batteries.
Operating Instructions — Video Screen
Push up on the release button to lower the video screen.
Lowering Video Screen
1. Screen Width Button
Changes the width of the screen picture.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
2. Enter Button
This button will enter the selection from the
on-screen menu.
3. Brightness Button
Changes the brightness of the screen picture.
4
Video Screen Controls
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Headphones
Power Button
Pressing the power button will turn the headphones
ON/OFF. An indicator light will illuminate on the headphone earpiece to indicate the headphones are ON.
NOTE:
• The headphones will turn off automatically in approximately 3 minutes if they lose the signal form the
system or when the radio or rear audio/video system
is turned off.
Volume Control
Rotate the volume control to adjust the volume to the
desired listening level.
Headphone Controls
1. Power Button
2. Volume Control
3. Power Indicator
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
Headphone Battery Service
• Press the button at the bottom of each headphone
earpiece and lift the cover upward.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
If you do not hear sound coming from the headphones,
check for the following conditions:
1. Rear Seat Audio/Video System and headphones are
on. Press the headphone transmitter button (1) on the
remote control and the power button on the headphones.
An indicator light will illuminate on the headphone
earpiece to indicate the headphones are ON.
Headphone Battery Service
• Replace the battery in each earpiece and reinstall the
cover. The headphones require two AAA batteries.
2. Weak batteries in the headphones.
3. Direct sunlight or objects blocking the line of sight
between the headphone transmitter on the video screen
and the headphones.
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — MP3 Player, Portable
Walkman
An MP3 player can be connected to the audio system.
Connect the cables to the RCA jacks located on the front
of the CD/DVD changer.
NOTE: Follow the manufactures instructions for the
correct colors when connecting the RCA cables.
Operating Instructions — Video
Games/Camcorders
A video game unit or camcorder can be connected to the
rear audio/video system. Connect the cables to the RCA
jacks located on the front of the CD/DVD changer.
NOTE: To operate a video game unit a DC to AC
adapter may be required, plug the adapter into any
power outlet.
Follow the manufactures instructions for the correct
colors when connecting the RCA cables.
NOTE: MP3 player’s, video game systems, camcorders
connected to the RCA jacks and CD’s or DVD’s inserted
into the radio, can be heard through the headphones or
the cabin when AUX Mode is selected.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satellite Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
System Activation
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ENS/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access With RBB, REV and RBK Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the Tape Eject or CD Eject (depending on the radio type) and Time buttons simultaneously
for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the twelve-digit
ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press the SEEK UP
button to display the next four digits. Continue to press
the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN/SID digits have
been displayed. The SEEK DOWN will page down until
the first four digits are displayed. The radio will exit the
ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the
ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any
button was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1 and
RBQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID numbers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
Selecting Satellite Mode in RBB, REV and RBK
Radios
Press the MODE button repeatedly until ⬙S A⬙ appears in
the display. A CD or tape may remain in the radio while
in the Satellite radio mode.
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selecting Satellite Mode in RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1
and RBQ Radios
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word
⬙SIRIUS⬙ appears in the display. These radios will also
display the following:
• After 3 seconds, the current channel name and channel
number will be displayed for 5 seconds.
• The current program type and channel number will
then be displayed for 5 seconds.
• The current channel number will then be displayed
until an action occurs.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-5397474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblocking. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 10 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (If
Equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the ⬙SCAN⬙
button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button while
performing a music type scan will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ
When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna.
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 O’clock
positions.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Remote Sound System Controls
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
The right hand rocker switch has a push button in the
center and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch
will decrease the volume. Pressing the center button
changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM to
Tape or CD mode depending on which radio is in the
vehicle.
The left hand rocker switch has a push button in the
center. The function of the left hand switch is different
depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand rocker switch
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand switch
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-button.
Tape Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
selection on the cassette. Pressing the bottom of the
switch once will go to the beginning of the current
selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it
is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second selection, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
take the following precautions:
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly diminished.
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from
slackness and dust when it is not in use.
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
adhering flat to the cassette.
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
WET cleaning cassette.
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being On in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating Controls
Front Blower Control
The Front Blower Control selects whether the Climate Control System is ON or OFF. When the blower
control is set to the O (OFF) position the front blower will
turn off and the system will be placed in the Recirculation
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
mode. When the blower control is set to any position
other than off, it selects the amount of air delivered to the
passenger compartment. There are four blower speeds.
The fan speed increases as you
move the control clockwise.
4
Dual Zone Temperature Control
Dual Zone Temperature Control — If Equipped
With the Dual Zone Temperature Control System, each
front seat occupant can independently control the temperature of air coming from the outlets on their side of
the vehicle.
This is accomplished by having a separate temperature
control lever for both the driver and front seat passenger.
The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures
while the red area indicates warmer temperatures.
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Panel Mode
Front Mode Control
The mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution.
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are identified by the small dots.
Panel Outlets
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. Moving the air vane knob on the center outlets
down, will close off the air flow from the center outlets. The
thumbwheel next to the outboard outlets can be rotated to
regulate or shut off the air flow from these outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost. A slight amount of air is also directed
through the side window demister outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
NOTE: In many temperature lever positions, the bilevel mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
4
Bi-Level Outlets
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
Floor Outlets
Mix Outlets
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy
conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Defrost modes are selected. This is done to assist in
drying the air and it will help in keeping the windows
from fogging.
Defrost Mode
Manual Air Conditioning Operation
To turn on the air conditioning, set the front
blower control to any position except O (OFF) and
press the A/C button which is located next to the
recirculation button. An indicator light on the A/C
button shows that the air conditioning is on.
Defrost Outlets
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. Use this setting when necessary to defrost your
windshield and side windows.
NOTE: For improved safety, the compressor is activated
and the recirculation mode is deactivated when Mix or
Cool dehumidified air comes through the outlets selected
by the Mode Control. To turn off the air conditioning,
press the A/C button a second time. The indicator light
will turn off.
NOTE:
• The compressor will not engage until the engine has
been running for a few seconds.
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the A/C air filter, if so equipped, and
the front of the A/C condenser for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. The A/C condenser is located in front
of the radiator. The A/C air filter is located under the
instrument panel on the passenger side.
• Fabric type fascia protectors tend to block the amount
of air to the condenser and may reduce air conditioning performance.
Economy Mode
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
off the indicator light, and the A/C compressor. Move the
temperature control lever to the desired temperature.
Recirculation Control
Press the recirculation button to recirculate the
air inside the vehicle. This is located next to the
A/C button. An indicator light on the button
shows that air is being recirculated. Use the
recirculation mode to rapidly cool the inside of the
vehicle. The recirculation mode can also be used to
temporarily block out outside odors, smoke, and dust.
NOTE:
• When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation
will be disabled automatically if these modes are
selected.
• If the recirculation button is pressed while in the Mix
or Defrost mode, the indicator light in the recirculation
button will flash 3 times indicating that recirculation is
not allowed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
A/C Recirculation Programming
The recirculation control is programmed to cancel the
recirculation mode when the ignition key is turned OFF
and will reset to outside air mode when the ignition key
is turned ON. The frequent use of outside air will help
keep odors from building up within the air conditionerheater housing. It is recommended that the recirculation
mode be used as little as possible, especially in humid
climates.
For hot and dry climates, or people who are allergic to
pollen and find frequent use of the recirculation mode
necessary, the recirculation mode can be programmed to
not automatically reset to the outside mode by using the
following procedures:
• Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
• Set the mode control to “PANEL”.
• Depress and hold in the “Rear Wipe/Wash” button.
• Start the engine, and continue to hold in the “Rear
Wipe/Wash” button until the indicator light starts
flashing repeatedly.
• Press the recirculation button until the indicator light
remains lit.
• The selection will be stored when the ignition switch is
turned OFF or if the “Rear Wipe/Wash” button is
pressed.
If the recirculation indicator light is lit, the recirculation
mode will not reset when the engine is started. If the
recirculation indicator light is not lit, the recirculation
mode will reset to the outside air mode when the engine
is started. The programmed status can be changed back
and forth by following the above mentioned procedure.
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Rear Zone Climate Control — If Equipped
The Manual Rear Zone Climate Control system has floor
air outlets to the rear of the right side sliding door and
overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position.
The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and
upper outlets.
Rear Blower Control
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit located on the instrument panel.
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear
seat passengers are located in the headliner near the
center of the vehicle.
Rear Blower Control
Manual Rear Zone Climate Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
The center knob on the front climate control unit has five
positions, “REAR”, “OFF”, and a range of blower speeds.
Only when the primary control for the rear blower is in
the “REAR” position do the second seat occupants have
control of the rear blower speed.
The rear blower control, located in the headliner near the
center of the vehicle has an OFF position and 3 blower
speed positions. This allows the second seat occupants to
control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Manual Rear Zone Climate
Control system through an intake grille located in
the passenger side trim panel behind the third seat.
The heater outlets are located in the passenger side
trim panel just behind the sliding door. Do not block
or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Temperature And Mode Control
When the center knob on the front climate control unit is
set to the “REAR” position, the second seat occupants
have control of the rear temperature and modes as
follows:
• The rear temperature knob controls both the rear
temperature and mode. When the temperature knob is
in the cold position, cold air will be delivered from the
headliner outlets. As the rear temperature knob is
turned towards hot, the air will get warmer, and the
air will be delivered from both the headliner and floor
outlets. When the rear temperature knob reaches the
full hot position, all of the air will be delivered from
the floor outlets.
• When the center knob on the front climate control unit
is set to any position other than “REAR”, the rear
temperature selection follows the setting of the driver’s temperature control on the front climate control
unit. The rear mode selection follows the setting of the
front mode control.
Rear Economy Mode
If rear economy mode is desired, set the center knob on
the front control unit to the “REAR” position. Turn the
A/C button OFF and select any mode except “MIX” or
“DEFROST”.
The rear temperature knob and the rear blower speed can
be adjusted as desired by the second seat occupants.
Automatic Temperature Control — If Equipped
The Infrared Three-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
System automatically maintains the interior comfort level
desired by the driver and all passengers. This is accomplished by using two infrared sensors, located in the
center of the instrument panel. The two infrared sensors
independently measure the surface temperature of the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
driver and passenger. Based on the sensor input, the
system automatically adjusts the air temperature, the air
flow volume, and amount of outside air recirculation.
This maintains a comfortable temperature even under
changing conditions.
Three-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
Operation of the system is quite simple. Begin by pressing the auto rocker switch to the “HI” or “LO” position,
the word “AUTO” will illuminate in the front ATC
display along with “HI” or “LO”. The system will then
automatically regulate the amount of air flow. Next, dial
in the temperature you would like the system to maintain
by pressing the driver’s or passenger’s temperature control button. The rear temperature can only be adjusted
from the front when the “REAR SYSTEM” knob on the
front ATC unit is in the “AUTO” position. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve
and maintain that comfort level automatically. When the
system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary
to change the settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to function
automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric by
selecting the US/M customer programmable feature.
Refer to the “Overhead Console-Customer Programmable Features” in Section 3 of this manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
off and “DELAY” will appear in the front ATC display
until the engine warms up. Also, an estimate of the time
remaining until the “DELAY” is over will appear periodically in the display. However, the fan will engage
immediately if the defrost mode is selected or by rotating
the blower control to any fixed blower speed.
This feature may be disabled using the following procedure:
• Press and hold the Heated Rear Window and Auto LO
buttons for 5 seconds.
• The “DELAY” symbol will flash to indicate that the
feature as been disabled.
This feature may be enabled using the following procedure:
• Press and hold the Heated Rear Window and Auto HI
buttons for 5 seconds.
• The “DELAY” symbol will flash to indicate that the
feature as been enabled.
Power Button
This button turns the entire system ON/OFF. When the
system is turned on it will return to the previous settings.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The “AUTO” symbol in the front ATC display
will be turned off when the system is being used in the
manual mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
the remaining features will continue to operate automatically.
Panel Mode
The left blower control knob can be set to any fixed
blower speed by rotating the knob from low to high. The
fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional
speeds are selected or either the ⬙Auto HI⬙ or ⬙Auto LO⬙
buttons are pressed. This allows the front occupants to
control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and
cancel the “AUTO” mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the air by
rotating the right mode control knob to one of the
following positions.
4
Panel Outlets
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. Moving the air vane knob on the center outlets
down, will close off the air flow from the center outlets. The
thumbwheel next to the outboard outlets can be rotated to
regulate or shut off the air flow from these outlets.
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost. A slight amount of air is also directed
through the side window demister outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the bi-level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Bi-Level Outlets
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
Mix Mode
Floor Mode
4
Floor Outlets
Mix Outlets
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy
conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: While operating in either ⬙Auto HI⬙ or ⬙Auto
LO⬙, the system will not automatically sense the presence
of fog, mist, or ice on the windshield. ⬙Defrost⬙ mode
must be manually selected to clear the windshield and
side glass.
Defrost Mode
Defrost Outlets
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. Use this setting when necessary to defrost your
windshield and side windows.
The ⬙snowflake⬙ or ⬙a/c⬙ button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air
conditioning system. When the snowflake symbol
in the ATC display is on, cool, dehumidified air flows
through the air outlets. If economy mode is desired, press
the snowflake button to turn off the snowflake icon in the
ATC display and deactivate the air conditioning system.
Note: While operating in ⬙auto hi⬙ or ⬙auto lo⬙, the air
conditioning system is always activated. If fog, or mist
appears on the windshield or side glass, select ⬙defrost⬙
mode and increase blower speed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, high
humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you
may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing
the recirculation button. The recirculation
mode should only be used temporarily. The recirculation
symbol will illuminate in the display when this button is
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
recirculation icon in the display and allow outside air
into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode
may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will
be disabled automatically if these modes are selected.
Auxiliary Rear Automatic Temperature Control —
If Equipped
The Rear Automatic Temperature Control System has
floor air outlets to the rear of the right side sliding door
and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating
position. The system provides heated air through the
floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the headliner outlets.
The “REAR SYSTEM” knob for the Rear Automatic
Temperature Control System is on the front ATC control
unit located on the instrument panel.
Selecting the “AUTO” position for the Rear Automatic
Temperature Control System from the front ATC control
unit, illuminates a “LOCK” symbol in the rear display.
The rear temperature and air source are controlled from
the front ATC control unit.
The “REAR SYSTEM” knob on the front ATC control unit
has three positions, “REAR CONTROL”, “OFF”, and
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“AUTO”. Only when the “REAR SYSTEM” knob is in the
“REAR CONTROL” position do the second seat occupants have control of the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System.
The Rear Automatic Temperature Control System is
located in the headliner near the center of the vehicle.
Operation of the rear system is quite simple. Begin by
rotating the rear system center control knob on the front
ATC control unit to the “REAR CONTROL” position, this
illuminates an “UNLOCK” symbol in the rear display.
Next, rotate the Rear Blower Control and the Rear Mode
Control to the “AUTO” positions. Select the temperature
you would like the system to maintain by pressing the
Rear Temperature Control button. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and maintain that comfort level automatically. When the system is
set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change
the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by
simply allowing the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric by
selecting the US/M customer programmable feature.
Refer to the “Overhead Console-Customer Programmable Features” in Section 3 of this manual.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control, located in
the headliner near the center of
the vehicle has an “OFF”,
“AUTO” and a range of blower
speeds.
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to
“OFF” or any fixed blower speed by rotating the knob
from low to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to
control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille located in
the passenger side trim panel behind the third seat.
The heater outlets are located in the passenger side
trim panel just behind the sliding door. Do not block
or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, press
the temperature control button down for cold and up for
heated air.
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Mode Control
The Rear Mode Control, located in
the headliner near the center of
the vehicle can be used to select
between Auto, Headliner, BiLevel and Floor modes.
Auto Mode
The rear system automatically maintains the correct
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occupants.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the bi-level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vane knob on the outlets to
one side will shut off the air flow.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
to section 7, Maintenance Procedures, of this manual for
proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To insure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Refer to section 7, Maintenance
Procedures, of this manual for proper coolant selection.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy
or humid weather. To clear the windows, select ⬙defrost⬙
or ⬙mix⬙ mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they
enter the plenum they could plug the water drains. In
winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush and snow.
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The climate control system filters out dust, pollen and
some odors from the air. Strong odors can not be totally
filtered out. Refer to MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE,
“Air Conditioner Maintenance” for filter replacement
instructions.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Intermittent Rear Wiper Operation — Manual
Temperature Control Only
The controls are located on the Manual Temperature Control head above the front blower control.
When the button is pressed and released and the
Ignition Switch in ON, the rear wiper will operate at a
fixed interval of about 8 seconds. As vehicle speed
increases, the time delay will shorten. The LED indicator
will light when the wiper is ON. Pressing and releasing
the button again with turn the wiper off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Rear Washer Operation — Manual Temperature
Control Only
The controls are located on the Manual Temperature Control head above the front blower control.
Press and hold the button for as long as spray is
desired. If the button is depressed and held while the
Intermittent wiper is on, the wiper will operated for a few
seconds after the button is released, then resume intermittent operation. If the button was pressed and held
when the intermittent wiper is off, the wiper will operate
for two cycles, then turn off. The LED will not illuminate
when Washer is selected and Intermittent is OFF.
Vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control,
the controls for these features are located in the middle of
the instrument panel above the radio.
4
NOTE: The washer will stop spraying if the switch is
pressed longer than 10 seconds.
Rear Wiper/Washer Controls
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Wiper Operation — Automatic Temperature
Control Only
Press this button to have the rear wiper have a
continuous wipe. When the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position, the rear wiper switch position as well
as an indicator light will show that the wiper is ON.
Intermittent Rear Wiper Operation — Automatic
Temperature Control Only
When this button is pressed and the ignition
switch is in the ON position, the rear wiper will
operate at a fixed interval of about 8 seconds. As
vehicle speed increases, the time delay will shorten. The
switch position as well as an indicator light will show
when the wiper is ON.
Rear Washer Operation — Automatic
Temperature Control Only
Press and hold the button as long as spray is
desired. If the switch is depressed while the wipers
are on, the wipers will operate for a few seconds
after the switch is released then resume the previously set
mode of intermittent wiper or continuous wipe. If the
switch is depressed when the wipers are off, the wipers
will operate for two cycles, then turn off.
NOTE: The washers will stop spraying if the switch is
pressed longer than 10 seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the front of
the engine compartment on the passenger side and
should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill
the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds
to flush out the residual water.
4
Washer Fluid Reservoir
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
Press this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the optional heated mirrors. A light
will show that the defroster is on. The defroster automatically turns off after about 10 minutes of operation.
If your vehicle is equipped with Infrared Three-Zone
Automatic Temperature Control the rear defroster symbol will show in the display screen when the rear
window defroster is on.
CAUTION!
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ 3.3L And 3.8L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System — If Equipped . . . . . 315
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 309
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
䡵 Traction Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . . 310
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Four Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 324
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Tires—General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Check TPM System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 332
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 333
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System — If Equipped . . . 337
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ 1,2,3, Or 4 Tire(s) Low Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 337
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . 353
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . . 348
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 363
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
5
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
CAUTION!
Long periods of engine idling, especially at high
engine speeds, can cause excessive exhaust temperatures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave
your vehicle unattended with the engine running.
WARNING!
Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
2.4L Engine
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key to the “START” position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine has not started
within 3 seconds, slightly depress the accelerator pedal
while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start
within 15 seconds, turn the key to the “OFF” position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting
procedure.
Cold Weather (Below 0° C or 32° F) or High Altitude
(Above 4,000 feet at all temperatures). If engine has not
been started within past 3 to 4 hours, slightly depress and
hold the accelerator pedal before attempting to start a
cold engine. Turn the key to the “START” position. When
the engine starts, release first the key, then the accelerator
pedal. If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds,
discontinue cranking and return the key to the “OFF”
position. Repeat the starting procedure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
Extremely Cold Weather (below ⫺29°C or ⫺20°F). To
insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.
See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump
starting procedures and follow them carefully.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
If Engine Fails to Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING”, “COLD WEATHER” or “HIGH
ALTITUDE” procedures, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
5
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly. Do not overspeed engine.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “NORMAL STARTING”, “COLD
WEATHER” or “HIGH ALTITUDE” procedure should be
repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
3.3L and 3.8L Engine
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key to the “START” position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine has not started
within 3 seconds, slightly depress the accelerator pedal
while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start
within 15 seconds, turn the key to the “OFF” position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting
procedure.
Extremely Cold Weather (below ⫺29°C or ⫺20°F) To
insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.
See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump
starting procedures and follow them carefully.
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
If Engine Fails to Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there while cranking the engine. This should clear
any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
5
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15
seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to
the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the key once
the engine is running smoothly. Do not overspeed engine.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “NORMAL STARTING” procedure
should be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
5
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Always depress the brake
pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of PARK.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the OFF or ON positions.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
Four Speed Automatic Transmission
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
Reset Mode - Electronic Transmission
The transmission is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transmission automatically shifts into second gear. The transmission remains in second gear
despite the forward gear selected. Park (P), Reverse (R),
and Neutral (N) will continue to operate. This Reset
feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for
service without damaging the transmission.
In the event that the problem has been momentary, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears.
• Stop the vehicle and shift into Park (P).
• Turn the key to OFF then restart the engine.
• Shift into the desired range and resume driving.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is
recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, dealer service is
required.
Gear Ranges
Transmission Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine
when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL positions into
another gear range.
“P” Park
Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never
attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range.
5
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
“R” Reverse
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
while in this range. The “3” position should also be used
when descending steep grades to prevent brake system
distress.
“N” Neutral
Engine may be started in this range.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
“D” Overdrive
For most city and highway driving, it provides smoothest
upshifts and downshifts and best fuel economy. When
frequent transmission shifting occurs while using the
“D” Overdrive position, such as when operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions, (i.e. in hilly
terrain, traveling into strong head winds or while towing
heavy trailers), using the “3” position will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build-up.
“3” Drive
This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The transmission will operate normally in First, Second and Third
“L” Low
This range should be used for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts will
occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts
occur earlier than other gear range selections.
NOTE: The vehicle computer will over ride Overdrive
and “3” Drive ranges by changing shift points if the
transmission operating temperature exceeds acceptable
limits. This is done to prevent transmission damage due
to overheating.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch on, the brake light in the instrument cluster will
turn on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
Park position. To release the parking brake, pull out on
the parking brake release located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
5
Parking Brake Release
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As an
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb
on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill
grade.
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be injured. Children should be warned not to touch
the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector
lever. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING!
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving: failure to do so can lead to brake failure, and
an accident.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems lose normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Lamp.
Anti-Lock Brake System — If Equipped
The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the
brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake
System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
5
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle is driven over approximately 15 mph
(25 km/h), you may also hear a slight clicking sound as
well as some related motor noises. These noises are the
system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the
ABS system is working properly. This self check occurs
each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past
approximately 15 mph (25 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
• the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
• brake pedal pulsations,
• and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
WARNING!
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason, the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
5
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short period of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and does not in any
way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolong operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
TRACTION CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Traction Control System reduces wheel slip and
maintains traction at the driving (front) wheels. The
system reduces wheel slip by engaging the brake on the
wheel that is losing traction (spinning). The system
operates at speeds below 35 mph (56 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
The system is always in the “stand by” mode unless,
• The Traction Control Switch has been used to turn the
system OFF
• The system has been deactivated to prevent damage to
the brake system due to overheated brake temperatures
NOTE: The Traction Control will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when in operation.
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the TRAC and
the OFF indicators located in the instrument cluster.
This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is
a normal condition. The system will remain disabled for
about 4 minutes until the brakes have cooled. The system
will automatically reactivate and turn off the TRAC and
the OFF indicators.
Traction Control Switch
• There is a Traction Control System malfunction
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, ice, or snow, turn
the Traction Control System OFF before attempting to
“rock” the vehicle free.
5
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
• European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
• LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
NOTE:
• P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
5
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the
TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted
on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
5
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
Tire and Loading Information
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
5
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
Kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
5
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either
the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side “B” pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
5
Tire Placard Location
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
5
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section
6 of this manual.
5
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
• Driving style
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability.
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
5
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of
your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling
and stress to steering and suspension components.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
• Fast tire wear.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) system uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic
sensors to monitor tire pressure levels (EXCLUDING
THE SPARE TIRE). Sensors, mounted to each wheel as
part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to
a receiver located in the instrument panel.
NOTE: The tire pressure monitoring system on your
vehicle will warn you when one of your tires is significantly underinflated and when some combinations of
your tires are significantly underinflated. It is particularly
important, therefore, for you to check the tire pressure in
all of your tires regularly and maintain proper pressure.
1,2,3, OR 4 TIRE(S) LOW PRESSURE
Low tire pressure levels of 28 psi [1.9 bars] (193 kPa) or
less detected in one or more tires.
Inspect all tires for proper inflation pressure, once proper
tire pressure has been set the TPMS system warning will
reset automatically once ignition switch has been turned
ON.
CHECK TPM SYSTEM
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) system requires service.
See your authorized dealer for service.
5
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
The TPMS system has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS system pressures have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable operation or
sensor damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage.
Do not use tire sealant or balance beads if your
vehicle is equipped with TPMS system as damage to
the sensors may result.
NOTE:
• The TPMS system can inform the driver of a low tire
pressure condition of 28 psi [1.9 bars] (193 kPa) or less.
The TPMS system is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a
tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS system should not be used as a tire
pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt entry into the valve stem, which
could damage the wheel rim sensor.
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
5
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following
precautions:
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and
other suspension components, it is important that only
chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate chain breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the chain before further use.
• Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about 1⁄2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps,
especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on the
method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for
use. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the
chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacture.
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time
on dry pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s
instructions on method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for usage.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest
a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire side wall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
5
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emission regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy when using high quality regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87. The use of premium gasoline is not
recommended. The use of premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high quality regular
gasolines, and in some circumstances, may result in
poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define
fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,
engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The
manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet
the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of
these blends may result in starting and driveability
problems and may damage critical fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane number. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
his/her gasoline contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
5
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives are not needed under
normal conditions and would result in additional cost.
Therefore you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
5
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left side
of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
NOTE: The driver’s side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling has stopped.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
NOTE:
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened. If the vehicle diagnostic system
determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, GASCAP will be displayed in
the instrument cluster odometer. Tighten the fuel filler
cap properly and press the odometer reset button to
turn the GASCAP message off. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle
is started. See Section 7 of this manual for more
information. Make sure that the fuel filler cap is
tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown in the
charts that follow. This information should be used for
passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
specified GVWR and GAWR.
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the
driver’s door pillar.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
WARNING!
Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle,
it is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it
is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that
neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
Example Only
Empty Weight
Load (Including driver, passsengers and cargo)
Total
GAWR
Front
Axle
2140 lbs
360 lbs
Rear Axle
2500 lbs
2544 lbs
2450 lbs
2544 lbs
1470 lbs
980 lbs
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a
driver).
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
5
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch includes a receiver attached
to the tow vehicle, plus a removable hitch head and
spring bar assembly that fits into the receiver opening
and hook up brackets that connect the spring bars to the
trailer frame.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your dealer for package
content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Heavy Duty
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
5
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/Transmission GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
2.4L Automatic
5,200 lbs (2358 kg)
Frontal Area
40 SQ. FT.
(3.72 square meters)
5,200 lbs (2358 kg)
40 SQ. FT.
(3.72 square meters)
5,200 lbs (2358 kg)
40 SQ. FT.
(3.72 square meters)
Max. GTW (Gross
Max. Tongue Wt.
Trailer Wt.)
Up to 2 persons & 85 lbs (39 kg)
Luggage 850 lbs
(385 kg)
3 to 5 persons &
40 lbs (18 kg)
Luggage 400 lbs
(181 kg)
6 to 7 persons &
N/A
Luggage Not Recommended
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
Engine/Transmission GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
3.3L & 3.8L
6,600 lbs (2993 kg)
Automatic
Frontal Area
40 SQ. FT.
(3.72 square meters)
6,600 lbs (2993 kg)
40 SQ. FT.
(3.72 square meters)
6,600 lbs (2993 kg)
40 SQ. FT.
(3.72 square meters)
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Up to 2 persons &
Luggage 1,800 lbs
(816 kg)
3 to 5 persons &
Luggage 1,350 lbs
(612 kg)
6 to 7 persons &
Luggage 1,000 lbs
(454 kg)
Max. Tongue Wt.
180 lbs (82 kg)
135 lbs (61 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/Transmission GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
3.3L & 3.8L
8,600 lbs (3900 kg)
Automatic with
trailer tow package
8,600 lbs (3900 kg)
8,600 lbs (3900 kg)
Frontal Area
40 SQ. FT.
(3.72 square meters)
40 SQ. FT.
(3.72 square meters)
40 SQ. FT.
(3.72 square meters)
* For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–
Safety Information Section in this manual.
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Up to 2 persons &
Luggage 3,800 lbs
(1723 kg)*
3 to 5 persons &
Luggage 3,350 lbs
(1519 kg)*
6 to 7 persons &
Luggage 3,000 lbs
(1360 kg)*
Weight must be reduced
Max. Tongue Wt.
380 lbs (172 kg)
335 lbs (152 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
by 100 lbs (45 kg).
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
5
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P for Park. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements — Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
5
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
− When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Information section of this manual on Replacement Tires for
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
WARNING!
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
5
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
4 - Pin Connector
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3” range
should be selected.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
7 - Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule “B” in
section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change
intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
− Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
− refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more information.
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
▫ Jacking Instructions — Stow ’n Go Seating . . . 369
▫ With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
▫ Jacking Instructions — Non Stow ’n Go
Seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures If Battery Is Low . . . . 387
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
6
366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the
instrument panel above the radio.
To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers, depress the
switch on the instrument panel. When the Hazard Warning Switch is activated, all directional turn signals will
flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
Hazard Flasher Switch
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
6
368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
• For vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seating, if it
is necessary to retrieve the spare tire from under the
vehicle on the side of the vehicle close to moving
traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the
danger of being hit.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369
Jacking Instructions — Stow ’n Go Seating
Preparations For Jacking
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK. Turn OFF the ignition.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
• Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
6
370 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Location — Stow ’n Go Seating
The jack, jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed
behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area.
Pull up on the lever to release the cover.
Remove the scissors jack and jack handle by rotating the
small wing nut to the left. Also remove the tool pouch
containing the spare tire winch handle tools, which is
located next to the jack and jack handle.
Jack Location
Jack Removal/Installation
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 371
Spare Tire Stowage — Stow ’n Go Seating
For vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seating, the spare
tire is stowed inside a protective cover located under the
center of the vehicle by means of a cable winch mechanism. The “spare tire drive” nut is located on the floor,
under a plastic cap between the front seats.
The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be assembled into a Spare Tire Hook to remove the compact
spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle or a
Winch “T” Handle to raise/lower the compact spare
tire/cover assembly.
6
Stow ’n Go Tools
372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions — Stow ’n Go Seating
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
2. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly,
assemble the winch handle extensions to form a “T’ and
fit the winch “T” handle over the drive nut. Rotate the
nut to the left approximately 33 turns until the winch
mechanism stops turning freely, this will allow enough
slack in the cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out
from under the vehicle.
Spare Tire Removal
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373
CAUTION!
WARNING!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch “T” handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
3. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the
Spare Tire Hook and pull the compact spare tire/cover
assembly from under the vehicle.
6
374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: If either front tire is flat, it may be necessary to
jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/
cover assembly from under the vehicle. Refer to jack
engagement locations in the following steps for proper
jack placement.
4. When the compact spare tire/cover assembly is clear
of the vehicle, stand the tire/cover assembly upright and
remove the wheel spacer by squeezing the two retaining
tabs together.
Spare Tire/Cover Removal
5. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the body, refer to the following illustration.
Wheel Spacer Removal
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 375
6
Jack Engagement Locations
376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. These locations are on the sill flange of the body and
consist of a pair of downstanding tabs. The jack is to be
located, engaging the flange, between the pair of tabs
closest to the wheel to be changed. Place the wrench on
the jack screw and turn to the right until the jack head is
properly engaged in the described location. Do not raise
the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely
engaged.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
8. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
9. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact
spare.
Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel covers.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 377
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the
left.
WARNING!
11. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Correct
wheel nut tightness is 130 N·m (95 ft. lbs). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.
A loose deflated (flat) tire thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in
the vehicle. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
12. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
13. Secure the flat tire as follows:
• Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tire
cover assembly in the rear cargo area, have the tire
repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Vehicle damage will occur if the compact spare tire
cover assembly is installed without the compact
spare tire in position. Place the deflated (flat) tire
and compact spare tire cover assembly in the rear
cargo area.
6
378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
14. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
vehicle, reassemble the winch handle extensions to form
a “T’ and fit the winch “T” handle over the drive nut.
Rotate the nut to the right approximately 33 turns until
the winch mechanism clicks at least three times.
WARNING!
A loose jack, thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts in the place provided.
15. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools.
16. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct pressure as required.
Secure The Spare Tire As Follows:
1. To stow the compact spare tire/cover assembly on
vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seating, assemble the
winch handle extensions to form a “T’ and fit the winch
“T” handle over the drive nut. Rotate the nut to the left
approximately 33 turns until the winch mechanism stops
turning freely, this will allow enough slack in the cable to
allow you to pull the wheel spacer out from under the
vehicle.
Jack Removal/Installation
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 379
WARNING!
A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly, thrown
forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger
the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the compact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place
provided.
CAUTION!
Spare Tire Removal
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch “T” handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the
Spare Tire Hook and pull the wheel spacer from under
the vehicle.
6
380 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is
down and place the tire into the spare tire cover assembly. Slide the wheel spacer through the center of the
wheel and spare tire cover assembly so that the two
retainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire cover on
the opposite side.
CAUTION!
The compact spare tire cover assembly must be used
when the compact spare tire is stored. Failure to use
this cover could drastically reduce the life of the
compact spare tire.
WARNING!
Verify that ’both’ retainer tabs of the wheel spacer
have been properly extended through the center of
the wheel and spare tire cover assembly. Failure to
properly engage both retainer tabs could result in
loss of the spare tire & cover assembly, which will
cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of control
of the vehicle.
4. Using the winch “T” handle, rotate the drive nut to the
right until the compact spare tire/cover assembly is
drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
5. Continue to rotate the nut approximately 33 turns
until you hear the winch mechanism click three times. It
cannot be overtightened. Check under the vehicle to
ensure the compact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned correctly against the underside of the vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 381
CAUTION!
WARNING!
For vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go seating, the
Winch Mechanism is designed specifically to stow a
COMPACT Spare Tire ONLY. Do not attempt to use
the Winch to stow the Full Size ’Flat’ Tire, or any
other Full Size Tire. Vehicle damage may result.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
Jacking Instructions — Non Stow ’n Go Seating
Preparations For Jacking
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK. Turn OFF the ignition.
• Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
6
382 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Location — Non Stow ’n Go Seating
The jack, jack handle are stowed behind the rear left side
trim panel in the rear cargo area. Pull up on the lever to
release the cover.
Remove the spare wheel, scissors jack and jack handle
from stowage by rotating the wing nut to the left.
Jack Location
Spare Tire Stowage — Non Stow ’n Go Seating
For vehicles not equipped with Stow ’n Go seating the
spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under the plastic cover at
the center rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the
liftgate opening.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 383
2. Fit the jack handle over the drive nut. Rotate the nut to
the left until the spare is on the ground with enough slack
cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Lowering Spare Tire
Jacking Instructions — Non Stow ’n Go Seating
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
3. When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end of
the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel.
4. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the body — refer to the following illustration.
6
384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Engagement Locations
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 385
5. These locations are on the sill flange of the body and
consist of a pair of downstanding tabs. The jack is to be
located, engaging the flange, between the pair of tabs
closest to the wheel to be changed. Place the wrench on
the jack screw and turn to the right until the jack head is
properly engaged in the described location. Do not raise
the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely
engaged.
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
7. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
8. Install the spare wheel, for vehicles with wheel covers,
align the notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on
the wheel. Install the cover on the wheel by hand only
and install the wheel lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered.
6
386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact
spare.
WARNING!
Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel covers.
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Correct
wheel nut tightness is 130 N·m (95 ft. lbs). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
12. Secure the flat or spare tire as follows:
• If your vehicle is equipped with cast aluminum
wheels, the center cap of the wheel must be removed prior to flat tire stowage. Store the center cap
inside the glove box or other storage compartment.
• Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide
the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel
and position it properly across the wheel opening.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387
• For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation,
stow with the valve stem toward the rear of the
vehicle.
• Using the jack handle, rotate the drive nut to the
right until the wheel is drawn into place against the
underside of the vehicle.
• Continue to rotate the nut until you hear the mechanism click three times. It cannot be overtightened.
Push against the tire several times to be sure it is
securely in place.
13. Stow the jack and jack handle.
14. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
pressure as required.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES IF BATTERY IS
LOW
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
6
388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If
the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow
this procedure carefully.
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow
battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean
over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps
to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin,
flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.
• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from the vent
holes. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output that exceeds 12 volts.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach and
without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake,
place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position for both vehicles.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the discharged battery. Connect the other end
of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster
battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the front wheels. You could lose control of the
vehicle and possibly have an accident. Accelerate
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be
poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
6
390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
and Drive. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 35 mph (55 km/h).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
With Ignition Key
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the
distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 miles (160
km), and the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72
km/h). Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmission geartrain failure. If the transmission is not operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 100
miles (160 km), the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels off the ground.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
• Always use wheel lift equipment when towing
from the front. The only other approved method
of towing is with a flat bed truck.
• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal, liftgate and fascia will occur.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the OFF position, not
in the LOCK or ACCESSORY positions.
6
392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL.
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved method of towing with out the ignition key is
with a flat bed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, is only permitted within the limitations
described in this section.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow a
front wheel drive vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage
may occur.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
䡵 3.3L/3.8L Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . 405
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 398
▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
7
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Steering Shaft Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 428
▫ Steering Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
▫ Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
▫ Windshield And Rear Window Washers . . . . . 414
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 421
▫ Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel And Underseat
Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
䡵 Integrated Power Module (IPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
▫ Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check . . 423
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal And Sidemarker
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
▫ Fuel System Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
▫ Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And
Back-Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
▫ Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . 442
▫ License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 444
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
7
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2.4L ENGINE
Engine Compartment 2.4L Engine
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
3.3L/3.8L ENGINES
7
Engine Compartment 3.3L/3.8L Engines
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the
7
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ignition key or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
7
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
Engine Oil Dipstick
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
Change Engine Oil
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to see if any apply to you.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
• Stop and Go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
• Trailer towing.
• Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service).
• Off-Road or desert operation.
If ANY of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown in schedule “B” of the “Maintenance Schedules” section of this manual.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on schedule “A” of the “Maintenance Schedules” section of this manual
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395.
7
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4 Liter
Engines
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your vehicle.
For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to
the Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.3/3.8 Liter
Engines
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Refer to your engine
oil filler cap for the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your vehicle.
For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to
the Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
Synthetic Engine Oils
There are a number of engine oils being promoted as
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use
such a product, use only those oils that are American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified and have the recommended SAE viscosity grade. Follow the maintenance
schedule that describes your driving type.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All the manufacturers engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all
belts should be checked for condition and proper tension.
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
7
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks, or
glazing, and replaced if there is indication of damage
which could result in belt failure. If adjustment is required, the belts must be adjusted according to the
specifications and procedures described in the Service
Manual. Low generator belt tension can cause battery
failure. A special tool is required to properly measure
tension and to restore belt tension to factory specifications.
Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emission control. New plugs should be installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug, malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the catalytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark
plugs, refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Information” label in the engine compartment.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at
the intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you
drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions, the filter element should be inspected periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on
Schedule “B”.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
7
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is permanently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
7
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system
performance check. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The A/C Air Filter — if so equipped, is found behind the
filter access door located under the instrument panel on
the passenger side. To replace the filter slide the lock
toward the rear of the vehicle (unlock position). Remove
the access door and pull the filter downward. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. Align
7
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the black arrow on the bottom of the filter frame with the
direction of airflow (away from the blower motor and
towards the center of the car).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedules” section of this
manual for the recommended air conditioning filter
replacement intervals.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.⬙
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
Front Suspension Ball Joints
The front suspension ball joints are permanently sealed.
No regular maintenance is required for these components.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
Steering Shaft Seal
The steering shaft seal, at the point where the shaft passes
through the bulkhead, is lubricated when it is installed. If
the seal becomes noisy when the steering shaft is turned,
it should be lubricated with a multi-purpose grease.
Mopar multi-purpose lubricant is recommended.
Steering Linkage
The tie rod end ball joints are permanently lubricated and
do not require periodic maintenance.
Drive Shaft Universal Joints
Your vehicle has constant velocity universal joints. Periodic lubrication of these joints is not required. However,
the joint boots should be inspected for external leakage or
damage when other maintenance is performed. If leakage
or damage is evident, the universal joint boot and grease
should be replaced immediately.
Continued operation could result in failure of the universal joint due to water and dirt contamination of the
grease. This would require complete replacement of the
joint assembly.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, liftgate, sliding doors and hood hinges,
should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to insure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
7
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield and Rear Window Washers
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine
compartment and should be checked for fluid level at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Exhaust Gas” in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
7
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection Of Engine Coolant
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
coolant type.
CAUTION!
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT engine coolants, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
coolant as soon as possible.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
7
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Engine Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review
these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% recommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000
Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher
concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
⫺34°F (⫺37°C ) are anticipated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Engine Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine cold, the level of the coolant in the coolant
recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
7
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
heat source or moving component which may cause heat
damage or mechanical wear.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
Brakes
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Maintenance Schedules.
7
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Brake And Power Steering Hoses
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling
indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention
should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest
to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
NOTE: Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings.
Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not
necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of
hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during
vehicle operation), should be noted before hose is replaced based on leakage.
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be performed
whenever the brake system is serviced and every engine
oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any evidence
of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration of the hose
can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
WARNING!
Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point or unidentified as to specification, may
result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
7
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid, all brake seal components could be
damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.
Fuel System Hoses
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with hoses which have unique material characteristics to provide adequate sealing and resist attack by
deteriorated gasoline.
Use only the manufacturers specified hoses in any fuel
system servicing. It is mandatory to replace all clamps
that have been loosened or removed during service. Care
should be taken in installing new clamps to insure they
are properly torqued.
Automatic Transmission
The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
All automatic transmissions are equipped with a conventional filler tube and dipstick. If fluid is added, it should
be added through the dipstick hole in the case.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
The dipstick is located just behind the radiator, lower
right side.
CAUTION!
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only manufacturers recommended transmission fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type. It is important that the transmission
fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the
recommended fluid.
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
7
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Procedure For Checking Fluid Level
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transmission and of the fluid.
To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level,
the following procedure must be used:
1. The vehicle must be on level ground.
2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a
minimum of 60 seconds.
3. Fully apply parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in P (PARK). Wipe the area
around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of
dirt entering the transmission.
5. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or warm. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82°C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has
been driven at least 15 miles (24 km). The fluid cannot be
comfortably held between the finger tips. Cold is when
the fluid is below 80°F (27°C).
6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated.
Remove dipstick and note reading.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD”.
If the fluid level indicates low, add sufficient fluid to
bring to the proper level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
CAUTION!
Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transmission
can cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water
from entering the transmission after checking or
replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap
is reseated properly.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Automatic transmission fluid should be changed on all
transmissions as follows:
Normal Usage — No change necessary
Severe Usage (fluid and filter) — Refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B”
Severe Usage is defined as:
• Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for Maintenance Schedules.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
Special Additives
Do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The
only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to
aid in detecting fluid leaks. The use of transmission
sealers should be avoided as they may adversely affect
seals.
7
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front And Rear Wheel Bearings
Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed.
No regular maintenance is required for these components.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear
water.
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and
Tar Remover to remove.
• Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
7
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To
remove heavy soil, use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select
a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes.
Only Mopar cleaners are recommended. Do not use
oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the
wheels’ protective finish.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean, then Mopar
Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary. Do not use
harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use Mopar Total Clean to
clean vinyl upholstery
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning High Gloss Front Door B-pillar
Appliques
When cleaning the front door B-pillar appliques, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Remove all dirt with a wet soft rag. A mild soap
solution may be used, do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. Glass cleaners are not recommended. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. To maintain the high gloss shine, apply a scratch and
swirl remover onto a damp cloth and apply to door
applique. Rub the applique with a firm pressure then buff
lightly with a clean cotton cloth until a high gloss shine is
achieved.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial householdtype glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window
7
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter
window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch
the elements.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Cleaning The Instrument Panel and Underseat
Cup Holders
Removal
Remove the ash receiver from the convenience tray if
there is a smoker’s package in your vehicle. With your
index finger, locate the stop tab located at the rear of the
convenience tray.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
Cleaning
Soak the drawer, with the drawer front facing up, in a
mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of
mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for approximately one
hour. After one hour pull the drawer from the water and
dip it back into the water about six times. This will loosen
any remaining debris. Rinse the drawer thoroughly under warm running water. Shake the excess water from the
drawer and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
Let the drawer sit in a dish drainer overnight to allow the
inside mechanism to dry.
Removing Front Cupholder
Press the stop tab, slide the entire drawer out and remove
it from the instrument panel.
Installation
Align the drawer so the plastic tracks on the drawer fit
into the steel retainer in the instrument panel. Push the
drawer forward. You may want to cycle the drawer open
and closed a few times to ensure proper operation.
7
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM)
Integrated Power module (IPM)
An Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains maxi
fuses, mini fuses and relays. A label that identifies each
component is printed on the inside of the cover.
Cavity
Maxi Fuse
Description
F4
30 Amp Pink
Front Wipers
F9
40 Amp Green Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Pump
F10
40 Amp Green Front Blower
F13
40 Amp Green Electronic Back Light (EBL)
F19
40 Amp Green Body Control Module
(BCM) Feed 1
F20
30 Amp Pink
Central Amplifier
F22
30 Amp Pink
Seats
F27
40 Amp Green Radiator Fan
F28
40 Amp Green Power Windows
F30
40 Amp Green Headlight Washers (Export
Only)
F31
40 Amp Green Power Sliding Door
F32
40 Amp Green Power Liftgate
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
Cavity
F1
F2
F3
F5
F6
F8
F11
F12
F14
F15
F15
F17
F18
Mini Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Fog Lights
Left Park/Tail Light
Right Park/Tail Light
RDO/IP Ignition
12 Volt Out Ignition or
Battery
20 Amp Yellow Horn
20 Amp Yellow EWD/ Rear Wiper
25 Amp Natural Rear Blower
20 Amp Yellow Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
20 Amp Yellow Electronic Automatic
Transaxle (EATX) Battery
25 Amp Natural ASD
20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
15 Amp Blue
A/C Clutch
Cavity
Mini Fuse
Description
F21
25 Amp Natural Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Module
F23
10 Amp Red
Ignition Switch
F24
20 Amp Yellow Hazard
F26
20 Amp Yellow Stop Lamp
F33
15 Amp Blue
Front/Rear Washer
20 Amp Yellow Spare (IOD)
7
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
position are fused with self resetting fuses that are only
serviceable by an authorized dealer. The power seats are
fused by a 30 Amp circuit breaker located under the
driver’s seat. The Power Windows are fused by a 25 Amp
circuit breaker located under the instrument panel near
the steering column. If you experience temporary or
permanent loss of these systems see your authorized
dealer for service.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
• Remove the 20 Amp mini fuse in the Integrated Power
Module labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD).
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
The Heated Mirrors, Lower Instrument Panel Power
Outlet and Removable Floor Console, when in the front
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Center & Rear Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Front Door Courtesy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Front Header Reading Lights — If Equipped . . . . . 578
Instrument Cluster Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC74
Liftgate Light(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Overhead Console Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . PC579
Removable Console Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . 194
Visor Vanity Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6501966
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior
Bulb Number
Back-up, Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, & Sidemarker . . . 3057
Center High-Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Fog Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Front Side marker, Park/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . 3457AK
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9007
Headlight (Long Wheel Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
7
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlights
1. Remove the three screws securing the headlight module.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
2. Turn the bulb socket retaining ring or the bulb assembly counterclockwise.
NOTE: On some vehicles it may be necessary to slide
the red release lock rearward and push forward on the
connector while depressing the release tab.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Park/Turn Signal and Sidemarker Lights
1. Remove the three screws securing the headlight module.
7
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Twist the turn signal socket to remove from the
headlight module and pull bulb from socket.
Front Fog Light
1. Reach behind the front fascia from under the vehicle.
2. Twist the front fog light bulb to remove from the fog
light housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
3. Replace bulb, reinstall socket and then reinstall the
headlight module.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker and
Back-up Lights
3. Squeeze the socket assembly tabs to remove it from the
housing.
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two tail light assembly push-in type
fasteners, by prying under the fastener head with a large
flat screwdriver.
7
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
light assembly.
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)
1. Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL.
2. Twist the bulb socket to remove from the CHMSL
housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket and reattach the
CHMSL.
License Light
1. Remove the two lens assembly mounting screws.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Replace the bulb and
reattach the lens assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate) 87
Octane
Engine Oil-with filter
2.4 Liter Engines (SAE 5W-30, API Certified)
3.3 & 3.8 Liter Engines (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
U.S.
20 Gallons
Metric
76 Liters
5.0 qts
5.0 qts
4.7 Liters
4.7 Liters
11.4 qts
10.7 Liters
13.4 qts
12.6 Liters
Cooling System *
2.4 Liter Engines (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000
Mile Formula or equivalent)
3.3 & 3.8 Liter Engines (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) †
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
† * Add 2.9 quarts (2.8 liters) if equipped with a rear heater.
7
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
2.4 Liter Engine Oil
3.3/3.8 Liter Engine Oil
Oil Filter 2.4 liter engines
Oil Filter 3.3/3.8 liter engines
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 engine oil. Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE grade, meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 engine oil. Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE grade, meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Mopar 4105409AB or equiv.
Mopar 5281090 or equiv.
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment.
87 Octane
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopar威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 448
▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
䡵 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 C
S
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
448 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
• Trailer towing.〫
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 449 M
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).〫
• Off-road or desert operation.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule ⬙B⬙.
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule ⬙B⬙.
Use the schedule that best describes your driving conditions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Stop for Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if S
C
required.
H
E
D
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or U
L
damage.
E
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals S
Once a Month
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and transmission; add as needed.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
450 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
• Inspect the brake hoses.
At Each Oil Change
• Inspect the CV joints and front suspension components.
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Check the automatic transmission fluid level.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
SCHEDULE “B” 451 M
SCHEDULE “B”
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions. Change
the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000
miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under
one or more of the conditions marked with an 〫.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
A
I
N
T
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
E
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high N
A
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
N
C
• Trailer towing.〫
E
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Stop and go driving.
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser- S
C
vice).〫
• Extensive engine idling.
• Off-road or desert operation.
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 452 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
A Rotate Tires
N
C Inspect the brake linings.
E Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. *
Inspect and adjust the power steering pump
belt tension on 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect the generator belt on 2.4 liter engines,
replace if necessary.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
3, 000
(5 000 )
X
6, 000
(10 000 )
X
X
X
X
9, 000
(15 000)
X
X
X
12, 000
(20 000)
X
X
15, 000
(25 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
18, 000
(30 000)
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B” 453 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect and adjust the power steering pump
belt tension on 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect the generator belt on 2.4 liter engines,
replace if necessary.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace as necessary.*
Replace the air conditioning filter.
21, 000
(35 000)
X
24, 000
(40 000)
X
X
X
X
27, 000
(45 000)
X
30, 000
(50 000)
X
X
X
X
33, 000
(55 000)
X
X
36, 000
(60 000)
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
X
X
X
X
X
8
X
X
X
M 454 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
A Rotate Tires
N
C Inspect the brake linings.
E Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. *
Inspect and adjust the power steering pump
belt tension on 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect the generator belt on 2.4 liter engines,
replace if necessary.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
39, 000
(65 000)
X
42, 000
(70 000)
X
X
X
X
45, 000
(75 000)
X
48, 000
(80 000)
X
X
51, 000
(85 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
54, 000
(90 000)
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B” 455 M
Miles
57, 000
60, 000
63, 000
66, 000
69, 000
72, 000
(Kilometers)
(95 000) (100 000) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rotate Tires
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
X
X
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. *
X
X
X
X
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
X
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engines.
X
Replace the ignition cables on 2.4 liter engines.
X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
X
Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt tension
X
on 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect the generator belt on 2.4 liter engines, replace if
X
necessary.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary.*
X
Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3.3 liter and 3.8 liter
X
engines, replace if necessary.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. 〫
X
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 456 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
A Rotate Tires
N
C Inspect the brake linings.
E Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter
Replace the spark plugs on 3.3 liter and 3.8
liter engines.
Replace the ignition cables on 3.3 liter and 3.8
liter engines.
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect and adjust the power steering pump
belt tension on 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect the generator belt on 2.4 liter engines,
replace if necessary.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
75, 000
78, 000
81, 000
84, 000
87, 000
(125 000) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
90, 000
(150 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B” 457 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3.3 liter
and 3.8 liter engines, replace if necessary. ‡
Check the PCV valve and replace if necessary.
Not required if previously changed.*
Replace the engine timing belt on 2.4 liter
engines. *
Replace the air conditioning filter.
75, 000
78, 000
81, 000
84, 000
87, 000
(125 000) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000)
X
90, 000
(150 000)
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 458 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
A Rotate Tires
N
C Inspect the brake linings.
E Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necesS
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
sary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter *
Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt
tension on 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect the generator belt on 2.4 liter engines, replace if necessary.
Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3.3 liter and 3.8
liter engines, replace if necessary. ‡
Flush and replace the engine coolant.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
93, 000
(155 000)
X
96, 000
(160 000)
X
X
X
X
99, 000
(165 000)
X
X
X
102, 000
(170 000)
X
X
105, 000
(175 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B” 459 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engines.
Replace the ignition cables on 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt tension on
2.4 liter engines.
Inspect the generator belt on 2.4 liter engines, replace if
necessary.
Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3.3 liter and 3.8 liter
engines, replace if necessary. ‡
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace as necessary.*
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. 〫
Replace the air conditioning filter.
108, 000
(180 000)
X
X
X
X
111, 000
(185 000)
X
114, 000
(190 000)
X
X
X
X
117, 000
(195 000)
X
120, 000
(200 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 460 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
A Rotate Tires
N
C Inspect the brake linings.
E Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necesS
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
sary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt
tension on 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect the generator belt on 2.4 liter engines, replace if necessary.
Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3.3 liter and 3.8
liter engines, replace if necessary. ‡
Replace the air conditioning filter.
123, 000
(205 000)
X
X
126, 000
(210 000)
X
X
X
X
129, 000
(215 000)
X
132, 000
(220 000)
X
X
X
X
135, 000
(225 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B” 461 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter, 3.3 liter and
3.8 liter engines.
Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt
tension on 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect the generator belt on 2.4 liter engines, replace if necessary.
Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3.3 liter and 3.8
liter engines, replace if necessary. ‡
138, 000
(230 000)
X
X
141, 000
(235 000)
X
X
X
144, 000
(240 000)
X
X
X
X
147, 000
(245 000)
X
150, 000
(250 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 462 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
A Inspect the PCV valve and replace as necessary.*
N
C Replace the air conditioning filter.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
138, 000
(230 000)
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
〫 This maintenance is required only for police, taxi,
limousine type operation, or trailer towing.
141, 000
(235 000)
144, 000
(240 000)
147, 000
(245 000)
150, 000
(250 000)
X
X
X
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
SCHEDULE “A” 463 M
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect and adjust the power steering pump
belt tension on 2.4 liter engines.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
6, 000
(10 000)
[6]
X
X
12, 000
(20 000)
[12]
X
X
X
X
18, 000
(30 000)
[18]
X
X
X
X
24, 000
(40 000 )
[24]
X
X
30, 000
(50 000)
[30]
X
X
X
36, 000
(60 000)
[36]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
M 464 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate Tires
E Inspect the brake linings.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engines.
Replace the ignition cables 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect and adjust the power steering pump
belt tension on 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the generator belt on 2.4 liter engines,
replace if necessary.
42, 000
(70 000)
[42]
X
X
48, 000
(80 000)
[48]
X
X
X
X
54, 000
(90 000)
[54]
X
X
X
X
60, 000
66, 000
72, 000
(100 000) (110 000) (120 000)
[60]
[66]
[72]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A” 465 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Check the PCV valve and replace, if necessary.*
Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3.3 liter
and 3.8 liter engines, replace if necessary. ‡
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60
months or 100,000 miles, whichever comes
first.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
42, 000
(70 000)
[42]
48, 000
(80 000)
[48]
54, 000
(90 000)
[54]
60, 000
66, 000
72, 000
(100 000) (110 000) (120 000)
[60]
[66]
[72]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 466 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate Tires
E Inspect the brake linings.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt
tension on 2.4 liter engines.
Check and replace the PCV valve , if necessary.*
Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3.3 liter and 3.8
liter engines, replace if necessary. ‡
78, 000
(130 000)
[78]
X
X
84, 000
(140 000)
[84]
X
X
X
X
90, 000
(150 000)
[90]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
96, 000
(160 000)
[96]
X
X
100, 000
(165 000)
X
X
SCHEDULE “A” 467 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Replace the spark plugs 3.3 liter and 3.8 liter engines.
Replace the ignition cables 3.3 liter and 3.8 liter
engines.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months
or 100,000 miles, whichever comes first.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
78, 000
(130 000)
[78]
84, 000
(140 000)
[84]
90, 000
(150 000)
[90]
96, 000
(160 000)
[96]
100, 000
(165 000)
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 468 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate Tires
E Inspect the brake linings.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engines.
Replace the ignition cables 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt tension
on 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect the generator belt on 2.4 liter engines, replace if
necessary.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Check the PCV valve and replace, if necessary.*
102, 000
(170 000)
[102]
X
X
X
108, 000
(180 000)
[108]
X
X
X
X
114, 000
(190 000)
[114]
X
X
120, 000
(200 000)
[120]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A” 469 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3.3 liter and 3.8 liter
engines, replace if necessary. ‡
Replace the engine timing belt on 2.4 liter engines only.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months, if not
done at 100,000 miles (160 000 km).
Replace the air conditioning filter.
102, 000
(170 000)
[102]
X
108, 000
(180 000)
[108]
114, 000
(190 000)
[114]
120, 000
(200 000)
[120]
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 470 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate Tires
E Inspect the brake linings.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt
tension on 2.4 liter engines.
Inspect the generator belt on 2.4 liter engines, replace if necessary.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Check the PCV valve and replace, if necessary.*
126, 000
(210 000)
[126]
X
X
X
X
132, 000
(220 000)
[132]
X
X
138, 000
(230 000)
[138]
X
X
X
X
144, 000
(240 000)
[144]
X
X
X
X
150, 000
(250 000)
[150]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A” 471 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3.3 liter and
3.8 liter engines, replace if necessary. ‡
Replace the air conditioning filter.
126, 000
(210 000)
[126]
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
132, 000
(220 000)
[132]
X
138, 000
(230 000)
[138]
144, 000
(240 000)
[144]
X
X
150, 000
(250 000)
[150]
X
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 477
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
䡵 Mopar威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
9
474 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 475
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Dealership name
• Vehicle identification number
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
9
476 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 477
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.NHTSA.gov. or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Washington DC
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
9
478 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
• Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams
and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computercontrolled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
• Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 479
Call Toll Free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
• www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
• www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories established by the National highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
9
480 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
482 INDEX
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299,414
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274,279
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296,411
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,291
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . 274,279,284,410
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control . . . . . . . . 275
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,60,68,84,206
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 417,418,443
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 26
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 27
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,20
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 284
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
INDEX 483
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,445
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,445
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE)
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . .
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . 412
. . . . . . 409
. . . . . . 409
. . . . . . 387
. . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . 145
. . . . . . . 428
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314,421
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314,421
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 82
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
10
484 INDEX
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 272
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214,234,238
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,83,345,415
CD (Compact Disc) Changer . . . . . 223,230,242,255,256
CD (Compact Disc)
Player . . . . . . . . . . 220,224,228,234,240,244,247,251,254
CD (Compact Disc) Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . 273
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,274
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210,399
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,76
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Coat Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Compact Disc (CD) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214,220
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
INDEX 485
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Console, Removable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184,185
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Coolant Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416,419
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 417,443,444
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,432
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,279,290
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Domelight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
10
486 INDEX
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 155
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 163
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,369,381
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 399,448
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396,397
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396,397
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,345
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305,307
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342,443
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401,443,444
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403,443
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
INDEX 487
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,83,345,415
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296,411
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405,444
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,439,441
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 444
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,440
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) Seating . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
10
488 INDEX
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342,444
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342,443
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威)
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . .
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
167
346
342
342
343
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . 208
. . . . 204
. . . . 205
. . . . 207
. . . . 311
16,25,339
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348,351
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348,351
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Head Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 148
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
INDEX 489
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 167
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Hook, Coat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421,424
Integrated Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143,144
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . 149,296,298
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Indicator, Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,203,204
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,372,382,383
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,372,383
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,383
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Key, Programming . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
Key-In Reminder . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
15
13
13
20
12
59
10
490 INDEX
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . 74
Latches
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,142
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,68,84,206
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437,438
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,440
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143,144
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Liftgate Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 210
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143,439
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
INDEX 491
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437,438
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 210
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,439,441
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 204
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,348,349
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Locks
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 74
. 413
. 190
. 122
Maintenance, Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 210,399
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
10
492 INDEX
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400,477
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401,444
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405,444
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403,443
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404,443
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398,399
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . 158
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,367
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,478
INDEX 493
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 324
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 175
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,381
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . 164,169,172
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23,169,172
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . 416,418
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,252,274
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,270
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . 214,224,234,244,251
10
494 INDEX
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,291
Rear Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Rear Seat Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,135
Rear Seating Flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,139
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,298
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,392
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 270
Removable Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184,185
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,76
Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
INDEX 495
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 48
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Center Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,137
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Easy-Out Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Integrated, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,122
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,133,135
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 417,444
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . 210
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,205,439,441
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
10
496 INDEX
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332,333,371,382
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305,307
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317,412
Shaft Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,436
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,436
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 54
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 284
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 208,367
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
INDEX 497
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 324
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,328,479
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,369,381
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324,325
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320,328
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371,382
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,392
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,210,318
10
498 INDEX
Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,318
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,445
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,445
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . 25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 167
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . 23
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 20
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,205,439,441
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . .
Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . .
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . .
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
INDEX 499
Vehicle
Vehicle
Vehicle
Vehicle
Vehicle
Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325,348,349
Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,436
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 26
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . 204
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299,414
Washer, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,298
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41,175
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Rear Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148,414
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Zone Control (Temperature Control) . . . . . . . . . . 275
10
500 INDEX
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
Download PDF

advertising